Home

Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide

1. Pin Name Function Details P S1 RX Serial Port 1 receive RS 232 N S1 TX Serial Port 1 transmit RS 232 L S1 RTS Serial Port 1 RTS RS 232 D S1 CTS Serial Port 1 CTS RS 232 B S1 DTR Serial Port 1 DTR RS 232 C S1 DSR Serial Port 1 DSR RS 232 E S1 DCD Serial Port 1 carrier detect RS 232 R S1 RI Serial Port 1 ring indicator RS 232 V S GND Serial Port ground F S2 RX Serial Port 2 receive RS 232 G S2 TX Serial Port 2 transmit RS 232 H S2 CTS GP IN Serial Port 2 CTS General purpose RS 232 input S S2 RTS GP OUT Serial Port 2 RTS General purpose RS 232 output U USB D Host USB data T USB_D Host USB data K USB_VBUS USB power 5V 100mA J USB_GND USB ground A S_PWR Power for serial devices Filtered unregulated voltage referenced to S_PWR M S_PWR Power return Switched overcurrent protected 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 133 Appendix B Connector Pinouts B 5 Ethernet Figure B 5 Ethernet connector receptacle SA gt Table B 5 Ethernet connector pinout Pin Function Ethernet MTL 3 Transmit Ethernet MTL 3 Transmit Ethernet MTL 3 Receive Ethernet MTL 3 Receive ool gt B 6 External SOH Figure B 6 External SOH connector receptacle A SOH RTN SOH REF SOH 3 0 SOH_PWR SOH_4 Table B 6 External SOH connector pinout Pin Function Det
2. Change Instrument F 3 4 Configure extracted file headings Playback Each time you open a different Store you must configure the headings to apply to time series files extracted with the Data Retrieval options Configure these file headings as appropriate to the data source Use the options in the Playback configuration page The options are identical to those included in the Taurus UI Playback page Section 11 1 3 2 Confirm Playback settings on page 107 and Table H 23 Playback page options on page 197 gt To open the Playback configuration page choose Configuration from the menu and then click the Playback link F 3 5 Check data availability and extract data The Data Availability and Data Retrieval options are identical to those included in the Taurus UI see Chapter 11 Accessing Data 1 66 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix F Apollo Light Utility F 4 Using the log files Apollo Light creates two log text files a startup log and a main log A new log file is opened each day that Apollo Light is run The date is encoded in the log file name for example Apollo 20050823 109 The startup log is written to Apollo yyyymmdd 1og on the same disk on which the current Store files directory exists one level above the Store files directory It contains startup messages only The main log is written to Apollo yyyymmdd 1og inthe apollo lo
3. 2 llle leen 29 DOH aba rc 3 ha hti net Reuter agetur aes donde E assertio ascetur edle ad Goda 30 Set the SOH sample rale oem a eu pe Ev REPRE Sd PAR d rx 30 SVSIemil gSs ie eitis a tec te iaa n Na En Tene Mech uten acd ne ERA 30 Set the log verbosity vs es aciceiceruntiehzrveserbixesgcuesirentepruxis 30 Alert MESSAGES escitas as a REEE amp eu Sven epe debe 30 Data availability information 0 0 0 0c BI 31 System configuration informati0N o ooooocoooocoaa 31 Maintaining the TAUS contas dr A REP ARES e 31 Powering the Tauste a evi res 35 Taurus power consumption 6 0 0 eae 35 Grounding a Taurus installation cs orsus 22s 35 Powering the Taurus ies oana a a a calas 38 Choose a power supply and cable 0 0 2 0 ce eee ee 38 Power up the Taurus cuencia bal died acer KAE Liga ae RAS 39 Specialized power up procedures 1 0 eee ees 39 Power up the Taurus in factory test mode 000 0c 39 Bypass the Battery Low High voltage disconnect settings on startup 39 Power cycle the Taurus o orones es sa AA teen eee 39 Configuring power manager settings n asaan 40 Configure power manager settings sssaaa aaaea 40 Changing a Taurus Configuration liliis 43 Configuration format and storage liliis ees 43 Configuration pages seal de Dey e E xe ete da UR EAR OE ba d Yama GL eR 43 Configuration audittrail so piere 2 2 44 Changing the configur
4. Stream NP Packets Set Taurus to stream data to a specified data acquisition server NAQS Apollo at the specified IP address and Port number Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is not enabled It is not enabled if Running Mode is set to Buffered set in either the Configuration page or the Advanced Configuration gt General page IP Address The address of the destination server a valid IP address in dotted decimal format The destination IP address can be either a multicast address or a unicast address Port The port number used for NoToNmxp Factory default is 32004 Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 2 3 Serial Port 1 The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 1 page provides options to set the serial communication protocol and has links to related sub pages Table H 17 See also Section 7 3 Communications over serial on page 55 Table H 17 Serial Port 1 page options Parameter Widget Description Mode Choose the serial port protocol Options are Raw SLIP PPP Factory default is Raw Hyperlinks Links to sub pages SLIP Raw PPP and TDMA See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of hyperlink behaviour on configuration pages Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons
5. llle 90 Upload a predefined sensor configuration 0000 eee eee o 90 Create a new sensor configuration from an existing file 91 Configuring calibration liliis RR uh 91 Recording Data EP 95 A s este ecran nb Ear aed Amat dee edid s eid aati etie woul 95 DataiStOreS ueber teu b DV MS ES Stith Yet Sr tole Ae e does 95 Create a Store cR RE VERRE EE NERA GLK RENE NE AA RAR 95 About appended Storessa caged ez eu El DR eb wu te E DAR RET IET MU Eu 96 Delete a Store 0 o 97 Reindex a StOre s3 s ad s aia ieed ua Preside deed ue ee Fgh as eed UEM RUE eed 98 Recording MOC rocio ll Ge Ray eie Sb ec ep eei eS De Lies 98 Insert and remove recording Media 0 eee 99 Format recording media sessy ek er 0 0 cece nnn 101 Format unformatted Media seresa serine 00 cee tees 101 Format previously formatted media 00 000 e eee eee 102 Switch recording to the other medium 0 00 llle 104 ACCESSING Dalla ciet tes ee td seen ee ie 105 General options for accessing data auaa cece eee 105 Viewing data in near real time 0 tees 105 Checking availability of data 2 1 eee 106 Extracting data to files with the Data Retrieval pages 0 000 106 Navigate Data Retrieval pages 106 Confirm Playback settings 0 0 eects 107 vi Contents Change the Playback settings for the current data extraction 107 Cha
6. If the Taurus is configured to Buffered mode you can start a data download if it is oper ating in Interactive mode see also Section 3 1 2 You cannot stream data if the running mode is Buffered whether or not the Taurus is currently in Interactive mode 3 1 4 Communications mode If the Taurus is configured to Communications mode Communications mode starts automatically when Interactive mode ends Running in Communications mode the Controller is on continuously This mode consumes more power than Buffered mode because the Controller is always on but it allows you to communicate with the Taurus continuously via an IP connection You can download data and stream data in Communications mode Shutdown page options Restart and Shutdown will terminate a download in progress and will inter rupt data streaming until the Controller is restarted 1 8 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus 3 2 About the Controller The Taurus Controller manages operations such as communications and networking the display and UI and the recording media The Taurus Digitizer operates continu ously whether or not the Controller is running Whether or not the Controller is running 1s determined by the operating mode you have selected see Section 3 1 Options in the Shutdown page such as Restart and hard shutdown with the centre key apply only to the Controller they do not affect
7. On the display it will show only up to 3 columns of data for the current Taurus Time Series channels On a browser it will show a column for all time series channels in the Store numbered 1 3 with the corresponding Taurus serial number printed above the columns Text views behave as for a single Taurus Store showing all channels in the Store 10 2 2 Delete a Store You can delete the active Store the Store that is currently in use and create a new empty Store This will permanently delete all data in the old Store 1 Log in and choose Store Tools from the menu 2 Click Delete Store This will open a page with options to set the new Store capac ity Figure 10 2 To exit the page without deleting the Store either click the Store Tools Menu button or choose another page from the main menu 3 Choose a Store capacity from the Store Size drop down list The list of options is based on the available space on the medium The option Full will use all available space on the medium 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 97 User Guide Chapter 10 Recording Data 4 Click Destroy amp Recreate Store to delete the current Store and create a new one of the configured capacity Figure 10 2 Delete the Store and create a new one JM Muf Store Tools Recreate 7 Active Media Compact Flash Recreate Store on Compact Flash Active Store Size 100 00 MB e ise ESO 100 y Store Size
8. Table H 20 TDMA page options Parameter Widget Description Enable TDMA Set whether to use TDMA When TDMA is enabled Taurus will send data to Serial Port 1 only during the defined time slot When TDMA is not enabled data are sent immediately when the line is idle Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is not enabled Frame Length ms The TDMA frame length in milliseconds Frame length must be set to the same value for the devices sharing the link for example a Janus Port n Taurus pair Integer from 1000 to 10000 Factory default is 4000 Slot Start The Taurus TDMA slot start position as a percentage of the entire frame Integer from 0 to 99 Factory default is 0 Slot Start plus Slot Duration must be less than or equal to 100 Slot Duration The Taurus TDMA slot duration as a percentage of the entire frame Integer from 1 to 99 Factory default is 80 Slot Duration plus Slot Start must be less than or equal to 100 The minimum slot size is determined by the largest frame that can be transmitted over the serial link Section 7 3 5 1 1 on page 62 Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 2 4 Serial Port 2 The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 2 page provides the option to choose the transmission rate between Taurus and a connected serial device Options a
9. The Data Availability pages show a summary of data availability and any gaps Section 3 8 8 on page 31 System configuration information includes current version information for Taurus hardware and software and a configuration audit trail with a record of all configu ration changes since the Store was created Section 3 8 9 on page 31 3 8 1 About the Taurus status colours The Taurus LEDs and status bars use the same colour scheme Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Status colours Colour Status Green Indicates that everything is working properly 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 2 5 User Guide Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus Table 3 1 Status colours Continued Colour Status Yellow Indicates a temporary situation that will resolve either to ok Green or to an error state Red You should not leave a Taurus that is in a Yellow state on the chance that it resolves to Red You can check the relevant status and configuration pages to identify the problem and the log files if more detail is required Red Indicates that a problem exists that must be investigated and fixed You can check the relevant status and configuration pages to identify the prob lem and the log files if more detail is required 3 8 2 Status LEDs Taurus includes 4 status indicator LEDs SuperLEDs to indicate overall unit status two LEDs one on the top panel and one on the connectors pan
10. For a passive sensor connect the output and calibration coils as shown in Figure C 1 and Table C 1 Figure C 1 Typical passive sensor cable design Not present in high impedance CH1 CHi CH1 GND CAL CAL CTRL DGND SEN_V SEN_RTN PWR PWR_RTN CHASSIS SENSOR TAURUS Note that the 4 7 MQ input resistors at the input of the Digitizer ensure that the com mon mode voltage will be negligible Table C 1 Typical passive sensor wiring list From To Colour Run Conn Pin Name Conn Pin Name P1 COIL P2 U CH1 RED 1 P1 COIL P2 C CH1 BLK 1 P2 B CH1 GND DRAIN 1 P1 CAL P2 N SEN_CAL1 WHT 2 P1 CAL P2 Z CAL1 CTRL4 BLK 2 P1 SHELL P2 b CHGND DRAIN 2 P1 SHELL P2 b CHGND BRAID Pinout will depend on the passive sensor that is selected 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 39 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconnection C 3 3 Active sensors For an active sensor with a differential output a typical cable design is shown in Figure C 2 Note that for simplicity one channel only is shown and the mass position state of health connections have been omitted A typical wiring list is given in Table C 2 Pinouts given are for the Trillium and the Taurus Figure C 2 Typical active sensor cable design Not present in high impedance Zo z CHI CH1 GND AG
11. eee teens 79 10 1 Media formatting options 1 0 0 ena 101 11 1 Predefined SOH downloads to csvfileS 0 0 0 0 cece ee 117 B 1 Sensor connector pinout s sasaaa auaa eaae 131 B 2 GPS antenna connector pinout s sssaaa aaaea eee 132 B 3 Power connector pinout skers s arana meia tee 132 B 4 Serial USB connector pinout a se 0 00 cee 133 B 5 Ethernet connector pinout saasaa saasaa saaa anaana en 134 B 6 External SOH connector pinout s s asaan 000 eee 134 B 7 NMXbus connector pinout 0 0 00 esrara narran n 135 B 8 USB connector pinout sasaaa aaua eee 135 C 1 Typical passive sensor wiring list llle 139 C 2 Typical active sensor wiring list suana aaae 141 C 3 Sensor cable wiring lists llli 143 D 1 Digital filter stages and associated decimation for each output sample rate 148 E 1 List of open source free software components 0200 aaa 149 H 1 Status page options n s anaana aaaea 177 H 2 Waveform page options ooooocooccconnco a EAT EEA tenes 180 H 3 SOH page options 0 0 tees 181 H 4 Time Series by Event file upload options 0 00 c eee 185 H 5 Time Series by Event time selection by phase options 20000 186 H 6 Timing status page options ooooccococcn RR III 188 H 7 GPS Satellites page options ooooococccoccac tee 188 H 8 GPS Map page options 0 0 cc eee 189 H 9 S
12. Advanced Configuration General Communications Security Playback Timing Calibration i Digitizer P Ea EL n Po Advanced Configuration Y Sensor Details Sensor Tritium 40 y m E Sensor Name frritium 40 SPILP Mode LP h XY ZIUNWW Mode XYZ se Calibration Mode vora y Needs Power IV Detect Sensor Presence V Sensitivity Units vmis Mass Auto Centering Sensor Tritium 40 m E Red Threshold V P Auto Center on Red B Yellow Threshold W ba Auto Center on Yellow Yellow Holdoff Time h fi 0 Retries per Auto Center b Retry Interval min fi Sensor Control Lines Sensor Tritium 40 y E EJ Assert On Level o y Deassert Oft Leve henz y Positive Voltage Level v muss y Pulse Duration s h y Ctrl Line 1 pin H xvziuvw onu y Ctrl Line 2 pin W SPP onse y Ctrl Line 3 pin G unused Deassert v Ctrl Line 4 pin Z ch 1 CalEnable y Ctrl Line 5 pin c ch2CalEnable y Ctrl Line 6 pin Y ch 3 cal Enable y 9 2 1 Setting sensor configurations interactively You can edit an existing sensor configuration add a new configuration or delete a con figuration 9 2 1 1 Edit an existing sensor configuration 1 Log in as tech or central and go to the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details page 86 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Choose the
13. Communications Channels 3 100sps Store Compact Flash ha 4 of 797 13 MB a Store Time Left 20d AAA iP 19971138 89_ Time 2005 11 17 20 33 15 Power 19w Packets 24 lt Status bars lt Waveform images Bose P 2 3 View or change configuration settings You can view and change configuration settings via either the display and keypad or via a browser over an IP connection 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 9 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 2 Quick Start 2 3 1 Making configuration changes The Configuration and Advanced Configuration pages are available from the Taurus UI main menu on either the display or a browser You must be logged in as tech or central to change the configuration See also Section 3 6 Navigating the Taurus Ul pages on page 23 Chapter 5 Changing a Taurus Configuration and Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access gt Note the functions of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons Apply will save configuration changes to volatile memory until the next restart of the associated Taurus subsystem see Section 5 1 Configuration format and storage on page 43 In most cases you can use Apply to test your changes before you commit the changes Commit will save the applied changes to non volatile memory as the new con figuration The Commit function includes Apply In most cases configuration changes are active as soon a
14. Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is not enabled Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 8 3 Triggers The Advanced Configuration Digitizer Triggers page provides options to select channels to use triggers and links to the relevant sub pages Table H 32 Trigger information can be extracted to a csv file Section 11 3 1 1 on page 118 See also Section 8 1 3 Triggers settings on page 75 Table H 32 Triggers page options Widget Description Enable channel n Select one or more channels to use triggers Configure the triggers in the related sub pages Options are enabled v not enabled Factory default is not enabled Hyperlinks Links to sub pages Input Filter Detector 1 Detector 2 and Detector 3 See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of hyperlink behaviour on configuration pages Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 8 3 1 Input Filter The Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Triggers gt Input Filter page provides options to set the filter Table H 33 This is used for all detectors Table H 33 Input Filter page options Parameter Widget Description High Pass Order The order of the high pass filter Integer from 0 to 5 Factory default is O High Pass Frequency Hz The 3dB corne
15. Table 3 2 SuperLED states LED state Unit status Off The Taurus has no power Slow blink The Controller is shut down Buffered mode or Communications mode after you choose Shutdown on the Shutdown page Fast blink Any of these conditions The Taurus is booting if the power was just connected The Controller is booting for example after a restart The Controller is running Communications mode or Interactive mode The Controller is writing data to the media in Buffered mode The LED colour will vary as Taurus initializes its status information during bootup Red solid 5s The Taurus is starting to boot immediately after power is connected Blinking green The unit meets all the conditions to capture data successfully For example the Taurus is digitizing has recording media is able to record to media and or transmit data if in Communications or Interactive mode has good power has good timing and the media door is closed Blinking yellow The Taurus is initializing status of one or more subsystems This is a temporary state that will resolve to either blinking green or blinking red gt You should not leave a Taurus that is in a Yellow state on the chance that it resolves to Red an error state You can check the relevant sta tus and configuration pages to identify the problem and the log files if more detail is required If the Store is reindexing the SuperLED will be bl
16. Timing configuration p 198 Calibration p 198 Sensor Details p 199 Sensor Control Lines p 200 Mass Auto Centering p 201 Digitizer p 202 Main p 202 Front End p 203 Triggers p 204 Input Filter p 204 Detectors p 205 Power p 205 Upgrade p 206 Log in to access Log In Log Off p 207 Change Password p 207 Shutdown p 208 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 176 Sen User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 2 Status The Status page shows basic unit and system status information in read only fields and widgets such as status bars and waveform images Table H 1 Status bars indicate subsystem status using a colour code and a text message some of these also provide a link to the relevant SOH or configuration page The status colour codes correspond to the status LED states That is red indicates an error state that must be investigated and fixed green indicates that everything is working properly and yel low indicates a temporary situation that will resolve either to a red or a green state Table H 1 Status page options Parameter Widget Description Mode The running mode for collecting data Buffered Communications Configured in either Advanced Configuration gt General Running Mode or in Configuration Running Mode Channels Number of channels Sample rate Options are
17. econo Fa ee E eed ode ne 164 Using Apollo Eight 222 A A A AA A A IAE 165 Working with data from multiple Tauruses llle 165 Requirements for accessing Store files 0 00 c cece eee eee eee 165 Select a Sto 8 cc eel ing ED a ede A RE RR eS Rates 165 Configure extracted file headings Playback ooooocoocococnocoo como 166 Check data availability and extract data ooooocoocooocco eee 166 Using the log filesS oooooooooooonrororr III 167 Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures oooocccoccoccccc o 169 Upgrading Taurus from Version 1 xx to Version 2 xx or higher ooo oo oooo o 169 Upgrading Taurus from Version 2 00 xx or higher 0 0 ee 172 Using the Taurus Upgrade page 0 cee eee 172 Ul Pages and Parametros 175 Taurus Ul page map 6 ee ete tenes 176 viii Contents Sl ui a e eS Eo anb bts aao dsd era bani dt 177 MavVetormisau enses eed ead ueque roe ia di 180 DOP ae lasci o eres S Ya ath ta rires Y tul vetus ceu era So 181 Alessi n uertit erc tret Nd bcc f e p e Dad as rid is Ed cfe dates 181 Data Avallability 2 diee rad ares ett EH EXN XP Nes 181 Montoro Descr a e ote d egt dodo Gnas ut vie rar ge ao ala dade died La 182 Week ous ore estoit ud rae Vect Sk D date qus do wack ROT MUR RR SPA S RR d 182 Day css ees spc Brees we Shae eae di dr MER b ERE ER RERO RR MR en E 182 dy IMMO 182 Tile Series at eum us dt la dem rad Guat a sea
18. figuration for example a configuration downloaded from another Taurus or some part of the configuration for example a predefined seismometer configuration The configuration is applied automatically on upload so Reset will not have an effect The configuration file is plain text in RDF Turtle format so you can edit it with a text editor ensure that you do not introduce errors Use the options on the Advanced Configuration main page to download and upload configurations Figure 5 1 shows all options for a user logged in as central You must have the configured recording medium installed in the Taurus before you can upload a configuration 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 45 User Guide Chapter 5 Changing a Taurus Configuration Figure 5 1 Advanced Configuration main page options Advanced Configuration General Communications Security Playback Timing Calibration Sensor Details Digitizer Power Browse Upload All config changes are saved to temporary cache Reset clears cache Apply applies changes Commit makes changes permanent 5 5 1 Download a configuration from the Taurus gt Go to the Advanced Configuration page and click Download then select a desti nation for the file 5 5 2 Upload a configuration file to the Taurus 1 Go to the Advanced Configuration page and browse for a configuration file on an external file system then click Upload If you get an error dur
19. 194 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 13 2 3 1 SLIP The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 1 gt SLIP page provides options to set up a SLIP connection for streaming data Table H 18 Table H 18 SLIP page options Parameter Widget Description Speed bps The data rate for SLIP mode Options are 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 Factory default is 9600 Protocol Protocol options include SLIP and CSLIP compressed for lower bandwidth usage Local IP The IP address of the local Taurus SLIP interface Remote IP The IP address of the remote SLIP interface Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 2 3 2 Raw The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 1 gt Raw page provides the option to choose the transmission rate between Taurus and a connected serial device Options are 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 factory default is 9600 See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 2 3 3 PPP The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 1 gt PPP page provides options to set up a PPP connection for streaming data Table H 19 Table H 19 PPP page options Parameter Widget Description Speed bps The date rate for PPP
20. 6 10e6 1e6 100e3 10e3 1e3 100 10 5 2 Factory default is Auto Pause Resume Pause the waveform display or resume a paused waveform You cannot adjust the scale on a paused waveform Show One Show Three View one waveform at a time or view all channel waveforms simultaneously Next Channel View the next channel waveform if Show One is selected Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 80 User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 2 Waveform page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Waveform images One waveform image for each channel displays data in near real time H 4 SOH The SOH page shows a summary of the Taurus state of health as of the time shown Table H 3 You can download detailed SOH information as csv files see Section H 6 Data Availability on page 181 and Section 11 3 1 Extract State of Health data toa csv file on page 116 Table H 3 SOH page options Parameter Description Temperature Internal temperature of the Taurus in degrees Celsius Read only Battery Voltage The power supply voltage accurate to 0 2V Read only Battery power cutoff options are on the Advanced Configuration Power page Serial Current An estimate of the current drawn by a connected serial device It is accurate to about 15 for currents over 100mA Read only NMXbus Current An estimate of the current at t
21. Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 8 3 GPS Map The GPS Map page provides a visual summary of GPS satellite status and related infor mation Table H 8 Table H 8 GPS Map page options Parameter Widget Description PDOP Position dilution of precision see Table H 6 TDOP Time dilution of precision see Table H 6 GPS satellite skyplot A skyplot showing positions of the usable GPS satellites labelled with the PRN codes and a graph of the received signal strength of each satellite in AMUs Update Time The System Time when the GPS data including the GPS time was last updated see also Table 8 1 Taurus time definitions on page 79 GPS State Tracking status of the GPS receiver Location The latitude and longitude of the Taurus and the altitude of the Taurus in metres H 9 Sensor The Sensor page provides sensor control and calibration command options and status indicators Table H 9 See also Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Table H 9 Sensor page options Parameter Widget Description Mass Center A function button to send a mass centre command Mass Lock Unlock Function buttons to lock and unlock sensor masses Mass centre images A graphic showing mass centring of each component with auto centre voltage thresholds as configured in the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details gt Mass Auto Centering page Sensor On O
22. M z 1 1HO n Jed jeufis uid 1ed eubIs juld 1Ied eubis utg red eubis uid ed jeubis Uld 41ed jeubis Uld Jed jeuDig uid eubis Uld v 1 Josuesid3 2 Vd4 zjeuua7 DNI Z SLS unii snineL 143 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconnection 1 44 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Filter Response D 1 Response overview Analog signals connected to the Digitizer module are filtered using a first order low pass antialias filter before being sampled at 30kHz This data is later low pass filtered and decimated using a 3 to 4 stage FIR filter to the output sample rate Depending on the requested sample rate different filters are used and a different number of filter stages are required The output bandwidth will always be 0 4 times the output sample rate The low frequency response is also configurable using the DC removal IIR filter With the DC removal filter enabled it can be set to a number of predetermined frequencies With no DC removal filter DC signals are preserved D 2 System filter values This section describes the transfer functions of the Digitizer module components D 2 1 Analog low pass antialias filter The analog antialias filter is a first order low pass filter with a corner frequency that is dependent on whether the Taurus input impedance is set to low impedance Low Z or high
23. OST is a registered non profit with 501 c 3 status Contact our Board for further donation information E 5 md5 js License BSD License Copyright c 1998 2002 Paul Johnston Contributors All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the author nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or pro mote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBU TORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDI RECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CON TRACT S
24. RTS CTS data collection from serial devices Serial device power pass through supply voltage External state of health 4 user defined 12 bit channels Data rate Configurable options up to 1 sample per 5 seconds Input range for each channel 2 0V DC Uncalibrated accuracy Maximum offset error 0 07V maxi mum gain error 2 or Maximum error 0 11 V from 2V DC to 2V DC SOH power 3 3V DC regulated 10mA maximum 1 26 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix A Specifications A 13 Power Supply input voltage 9V to 36V DC Power consumption average typical Typical configurations Buffered mode 12V 3 channel 100sps lt 100 usec timing precision 750mW recording to CF card 800mW recording to IDE hard drive Communications mode 12V 3 channel 100sps 100 usec timing precision real time Ethernet or serial communication 2 3W typical continuous recording to CF card Interactive mode all systems operational including colour graphics display continuous recording to hard drive 3 3W In any mode For Input Impedance configured to High Impedance high power add 40mW For GPS configured to Always On add 200mW Protection Fuseless design with configurable low and high voltage disconnect reverse protection and short circuit protection Isolation Supply power is isolated from signal ground Earth Pre drilled hole for M
25. WISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE OpenBSD LICENCE v 1 19 2004 08 30 09 18 08 markus Exp 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 61 User Guide Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information 1 62 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Apollo Light Utility Apollo Light is a utility for extracting data from Nanometrics Store files on your PC It provides a web interface with the same options to view data availability and to down load data that are provided in the Taurus UI 9 Note Apollo Light is used for Stores created with Taurus firmware V2 xx indi cated by file names of the form taurus 0123 001 store For Stores created with Taurus firmware V1 xx indicated by file names of the form NmxVolume_001 use the TaurusExtract utility Apollo Light is supported on Windows and Linux Unix It has been tested on Microsoft Windows XP using Java2RE 1 4 2 F 1 Installing Apollo Light gt To install Apollo Light extract the files from apollo 2_xx_yy zip on the Taurus CD to your PC The files will unzip to a directory named apollo gt Additionally on Linux Unix set the apollo sh file to be executable Change to the apollo directory and then enter the command chmod x apollo sh F2 Running Apollo Light Apollo Light requires Java 9 Note Apollo Light must always be started from the command line Tha
26. by comparing the version number on the page with the version in the release 2 xx yy directory 12 From the telnet session run the testcode script to set the installed files to Active and to force creation of a Version 2 xx data Store this will delete the Version 1 xx data Store testcode sh forc The unit will reboot automatically Note The Taurus will try to use IDE as the recording medium on this reboot as that is the initial default with the new firmware If you had CF as the con figured recording medium prior to the upgrade the Status page will indi cate that no data are available To select CF log in either as tech password is tech or central password is central Choose Store Tools from the menu then click Switch Media and follow the instructions shown in the UI 13 After the Taurus has finished booting indicated by the Ethernet LED blinking green press the centre key for about 1 second to start the display It will take the display a few minutes to start up Check the Status page for normal operation for example you should see packets increasing for either recording medium and waveforms moving on the Status page if your unit was previously configured to use IDE as the recording medium See also the Note above this step 14 To check if the upgrade was successful go to the System Info page and confirm that versions are the same as those in the Taurus directory mnt media upgrade release 2 xx yy The items sho
27. gt Phone and Modem Options Click on the Modems tab Click Properties Click on the Diagnostics tab Set Append to Log to enabled Click View log to see an updated log at any time 7 3 6 4 Viewing modem logs on Linux Note This does not take effect until after a reboot View the log in var log PPP This information is copied from http axion physics ubc ca ppp linux html Logging Message Logging In order to figure out what is happening while you are trying to log on to your ISP you must turn on debugging and log the debug messages to some file The key pro grams are pppd and a program it uses called chat We will store those debug ging messages in a file called var log ppp You can use any file you wish including var log messages Some distributions are now installing a direc tory called var log ppp Eg The Corel distribution does this If yours does you must use a different name eg var log ppplog Use that name instead everywhere this document talks about var log ppp In order that your system will record the debugging information from both these programs do the following cp etc syslog conf etc syslog conf orig to make sure you have a copy of a good version in case you mess up the next com mand If you have trouble copy back the original version 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 65 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications Edit etc syslog conf and add
28. or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Pro gram or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Pro 1 54 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information gram subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compli ance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and th
29. or equivalent to connect the Taurus to your LAN Make sure the Taurus is connected to your LAN before you power up the Taurus Figure 7 2 Ethernet configuration pages VY Advanced Configuration Y Communications Default Interface Etherne Ethernet Data Streaming Se ort 1 Serial Port 2 Discovery presos ar cont nece Y Ethernet Mode Static IP iv Static IP Address 1921684122 Static Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Static Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 7 2 1 Configuring Ethernet settings 1 Log in and go to the Advanced Configuration gt Communications page Figure 7 2 5 4 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 2 Ensure the Default Interface is set to Ethernet Section 7 1 1 1 on page 53 3 Click the Ethernet hyperlink 4 Choose a Mode for the Taurus to define its Ethernet interface DHCP The Taurus will search for a DHCP server to obtain a network address If a DHCP server is not found the Taurus will use Link Local protocol to acquire an available IP address Link Local The Taurus will use trial and error testing of the LAN for address conflicts to acquire an available IP address in the Link Local address space of 169 254 16 Static IP The Taurus will use the specified Static IP Address Static Subnet Mask and Static Default Gateway settings to define its Ethernet interface Therefore for this mode also set these
30. 11 3 1 1 on page 118 A trigger packet contains the following information Trigger start time Trigger duration Channel and detector identification STA at trigger detection LTA at trigger detection 76 User Guide Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 2007 02 09 Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing Figure 8 2 Trigger configuration pages Advanced Configuration Y Advanced Configuration Y Triggers Enable channel 1 Enable channel 2 Enable channel 3 Input Filter Detector 1 Detector 2 Detector 3 E E Presa Ls y 1G gg Input Filter Detector 3 High Pass Order 0 STA Time constant s h High Pass Frequency Hz 0 00100000 LTA Time constats 6 Low Pass Order o Trigger On Ratio E A Low Pass Frequency Hz 4 j Trigger Off Ratio n e EN EN Maximum Duration s NEG Latch LTA 8 1 3 1 Input filter parameters See Table H 33 Input Filter page options on page 204 for parameter value ranges 1 Log in as tech or central 2 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Triggers gt Input Filter page choose input filter parameters as appropriate to your application in general to pass fre quencies of expected seismic events of interest while blocking seismic noise peak frequencies as much as possible High Pass Order The order of the high pass filter Factory default is 0 e High Pass Frequency Hz The 3dB corner frequency in her
31. 182 Time Series band essi e a Le eoe e a e Nd ARS E 183 ule E CUP 183 Ole batuta erii e E ul iu eR Resend at he a am 183 Data Retrieval ooooooooor ear 183 Tifrie Series aes Ra A root CRM XS Delo LA Rex cede i NOD AMIGA D RM seb cb AR RM 184 Time Series By Event xcu So eee ee eka bad Fe ERO EG UAR ROI Re a 185 State of Health i oss RPVREUETb Sa wae RPiBGebskXideuecsis 186 SySIem l 098 Getestet urere tal amas dr bas 187 System Configurations nes warmia aa Eo a he 187 aa a o E EE e ud RR RC eed Sede ed EE EE E EEEE eden EE E 187 Tage a AAA A ul nie putei cet hun 187 GPS Satellites 21h dre e hes aa ghee EE blond ed ege Rates s 188 GPS Map ps sito tta du EC ERR EE RU RS EPA Ee E ek ci il 189 SenSOl soi sre vocate ei Parte Tee iiec t bu Uu MCA np acea TP RID et Dash thee faci cat i tdg 189 Store O RO AN 190 Configura mos a io priced e ae ei 190 System Info oos a de dl ae ar 191 Advanced Configurati0N ooooccoccccccrc nee 191 GOneral cidad ears DE Ace done eee od eR ee of don wound Bardia RR ation 192 COMMUNICATIONS x scd eius repe ia nd avd aie dead God 193 Ethernet san ARO ur Aoi ade ara E eati ach DATE RINT E Mak onset RA 193 Data Streaming siseste vv teu scd tulit Dead vitem ie edad ius 194 SerialPort aui it cat ra a i a at d i e Pa woe atat N 194 SLIPS ias tal lan bemus uU de A ut Gael uw E LM LLL 195 BaWias icem a A S oe MOL E STARR e dac sh ans as o DADA FTN n 195 PPP a eI DI ENE E deg D UE Arc DLE D
32. 2 Open the Advanced Configuration gt Timing page 3 4 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit Set Digitizing Needs GPS Lock to enabled v If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 81 User Guide Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing 82 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Controlling and Configuring Sensors This chapter provides overviews of sensor control options and configuration settings and procedures for changing the sensor configuration 9 1 Sensor monitoring and control The Sensor page provides options for you to monitor and control the operation of the sensor 9 1 1 Monitoring sensor operation The Sensor page shows the following near real time information about your sensor Figure 9 1 The mass position of each component and the mass auto centre voltage thresholds as configured in the Advanced Configuration Sensor Details Mass Auto Centering page This information can also be extracted to an Environment SOH file see Section 11 3 1 Extract State of Health data to a csv file on page 116 For active sensors an estimate of the sensor power consumption is shown beside the Sensor On Off buttons It is accurate to about 15 96 for sensors drawing more than about 8mA Related items on the main Status page
33. Bypass the Battery Low High voltage disconnect settings on startup on page 39 This field will accept values slightly outside the recommended range gt Ensure that the value you have entered is between 9000 and 36000 Hysteresis Low mV Battery Low turn on level in millivolts Integer within the range Battery High and Battery Low Factory default is 11800 Delay Low ms Battery low reaction delay factor in milliseconds Integer from 0 to 300 Factory default is 30 Battery High mV Battery high voltage threshold in millivolts Integer from 9000 to 36000 Factory default is 36000 This field will accept values slightly outside the recommended range gt Ensure that the value you have entered is between 9000 and 36000 Hysteresis High mV Battery High turn on level in millivolts Integer within the range Battery High and Battery Low Factory default is 35000 Delay High ms Battery high reaction delay factor in milliseconds Integer from 0 to 300 Factory default is 2 Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 14 Upgrade For Taurus firmware version 2 x and higher there is a firmware Upgrade page that pro vides options as listed in Table H 36 See also Section G 2 Upgrading Taurus from Version 2 00 xx or higher on page 172 You must be logged in as central to use this page Table H 36 Upgrade page op
34. Calibration gt Sensor Details i r Channel 2 IV Power Channel 3 Vv KATAA Attenuation O sz ql lE Arda a Amplitude pa 00000 eg Notes 1 Wait Time s ict B Ramp Duration s o x Duration s 60 v Sine Frequency Hz foco Pulse Duration ms CN PRB Pulse Width ms 1000 Previous EN Commit m If you have configured your sensor for current mode calibration con trol lines 4 5 and 6 will not be available for any other configuration option They will be reserved for calibration current return 2 If a sensor has one calibration enable line and multiple calibration sig nal inputs for example STS 2 to calibrate a different channel you must reconfigure the calibration channel each time 1 Log in as tech or central 2 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Calibration page set parameter values as appro priate for your application Calibration Type The type of calibration signal to use either sine wave pulse signal or pseudo random binary Options are Sine Pulse PRB Factory default 1s Sine Channel n Choose whether to enable this channel for calibration Options are enabled v not enabled Factory default is enabled Attenuation Use attenuation to select the range when lower amplitude signals are desired A more accurate 5mV signal is generated when using attenuation of 1000 and amplitude 5 V rather than attenuation of 1 and amplitude 0 005 V Options are 1 10 100 1000 Facto
35. For example for 3 channels at 100sps and 2MB RAM typically you would have approximately 30 minutes to remove the current medium insert the new medium and close the media door before the buffer wraps and begins to overwrite the oldest data in the buffer 1 Power down the Controller using the Shutdown option on the Shutdown page Figure 10 3 Figure 10 3 Shut down the Controller Turn Off Display LIH EIN 2 Open the media door Figure 10 4 a Lift the black plastic lever on the media door knob and twist the door knob counter clockwise to the unlocked position vertical b The plastic lever has tabs that help remove the door Push the lever flat against the door so these tabs push against the Taurus chassis This will cause the door to pop free of the Taurus Air pressure differential inside versus outside the Taurus case for example if the Taurus was transported by air may make the media door difficult to remove gt If this occurs loosen but do not remove the pressure relief screw Figure 2 4 on page 15 allowing the pressure to equalize Remove the media door and then gently tighten the pressure relief screw hand tight is sufficient 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 99 User Guide Chapter 10 Recording Data Figure 10 4 Open the media door 3 Check the MediaLED status to ensure it is safe to remove the IDE CF that is ensure that the MediaLED is green or off if the Taurus
36. Gage ia ede a en 19 Starting up and shutting down the Taurus llle 19 Start the FAUTUS s s reine Ste tere bie iid ea aet He ORAE wee Ed detras 19 Starbthe Controller etit a ei eur ri ROM ue at ete AN ea ATE 20 Shut down the Controller 00 RR RR IRR 20 Contents Restar the Controler aca id A a 21 Set the UI timeout display timeout liil 21 Turn otf the display xiu eve reperi I a MIN 22 Using the Taurus keypad 0 c cece ne 22 Accessing the Taurus from a remote browser 0000 cece lese 22 Using the web interface over slow linkS 00000 cece ences 23 Navigating the Taurus Ul pageS 6 0 isses IIIA 23 Choose amain PAGO mina Bake bla ten we ur aie eae wi RF NAR RO C TIR MIRA 23 Browser navigation x ritenere d AA Es 24 Preserve configuration changes or data retrieval settingS 24 Select an active field or a hyperlink llle 24 Using the virtual keyboard ooocoocccocccc RR I 24 Monitoring Taurus operation coooccooccoco RII I 25 About the Taurus status colours oooooccocccc eee 25 Status LEDS ovo de eee E eror aed dite e ARI e a Nota a aA UR d 26 About LED blink patterns uerb ias ria Di XR SEX CR aS 26 Unit status LEDs SuperLEDs eieaa eia o 26 Ethernet status LED EtherLED lise 28 Media status LED MediaLED i saans t misaia a ae a R E BI 28 SS Das a EEEN 29 Pages showing current status information
37. IURE TRE de 71 Front Ena settings er emet ed b ere es de od vert Je en Pe 72 Contents INPUER ANTE dose deed te es AAA A ane 73 Input Impedance and common mode fange ooocccccc as 74 Enable Dithei a ea et amie A Fu edes 74 Software Gallix cere RENE rd ee Rx Ee etas 75 Enable Hard Clipes eaan 2 beard b beet ret it etre E ERAS AT ee 75 Triggers setlirnigs 3 sers as a cd DRE Rae ea 75 Input filter parameters llle II 77 Detector algorithm parameters 0 cece eee 78 Configuring Taurus timing seci de earren vats mice digit eee edad dee eed 78 GPS receiver duty cycle 2 0 0 0 cece tee 79 System time correction llle rn 80 Time error reset options ooococococonon ee eee 80 Digitizing on startup with GPS lock ooocooccocoooco ee 81 Controlling and Configuring Sensors liliis 83 Sensor monitoring and control a se saaa eee 83 Monitoring sensor operation illl m 83 Sending commands to the Sensor 0 0 0 eee eens 84 Manual sensor control 0 eects 84 Mass anto cemin vs eae neta e eet ed eG HE YE ool nee doa dar nls 85 Sensor configuration 0 00 tees 85 Setting sensor configurations interactively 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 86 Edit an existing sensor configuration ooooccocccoooo eee 86 Add a new sensor configuration 0 llle res 88 Delete a sensor configuration 2er 89 Using predefined sensor configurations
38. MB Store Space Used 17 50 MB IDE Available Yes Switch Media Format IDE Delete Store Destroy amp Recreate Store Store Tools Menu 10 2 3 Reindex a Store If the Store is not closed down properly for example if Shutdown is not used before the power is disconnected it may need to be reindexed Generally the Taurus will ini tiate reindexing on startup if it is required You should not have to invoke reindexing manually You may choose to reindex if for example you believe that the Store has recorded data but it does not appear in the Data Availability lists It will recalculate the index within the Store synchronizing the index with the actual data that are available Reindexing may take a long time depending on how much data are in the Store Data will continue to be generated during this task and will not be lost You will not be able to do other operations that involve the Store at the same time 1 Log in and go to the Store Tools page 2 Click Reindex Store You will be prompted for confirmation To exit the page without reindexing the Store either click the Store Tools Menu button or choose another page from the main menu 3 To proceed click Yes Reindex Store 10 3 Recording media Warning Hard drives may be damaged permanently if they are operated at alti tudes or temperatures beyond specified high and low limits Do not operate the Taurus if itis at an altitude or unit t
39. Other active sensors will sometimes have single ended output stages Passive seis 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 37 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconnection mometers have an isolated output coil Active sensor power supplies may or may not be isolated The Trillium 240 output is a balanced differential output with a clip level of 16V peak to peak and an output impedance of 30002 1504 each output The Trillium power supply is completely isolated from the rest of the electronics and the case The Trillium also provides mass position outputs and a calibration input For the Trillium 40 active low control inputs serve as calibration enables and to configure the output signals and short or long period frequency response For the Trillium 120P and Trillium 240 2400BS models these inputs are active high C 2 Shielding Sensor cables must be designed for good EMI shielding This is most easily accom plished using double shielded twisted pair cable as shown in Figure C 1 and Figure C 2 The twisted pairs provide magnetic shielding an inner shield grounded at the digitizer provides good electric field shielding and a continuous outer shield provides good high frequency RF shielding The outer shield must be earthed for safety C 3 Grounding C 3 1 General considerations The digitizer and sensor cases must always have a low resistance path to ground for safety However directly earthing both in
40. Ratio The STA LTA threshold above which the associated chan nel is triggered In general choose a value low enough to be sensitive to events of interest but high enough to minimize false triggers Factory default is 5 Trigger Off Ratio The STA LTA threshold below which the associated chan nel trigger is switched off In general choose a value low enough to encom pass the coda waves for events of interest but high enough to terminate the trigger reasonably The trigger will terminate either when the Trigger Off Ratio is achieved or when the Maximum Duration has expired Factory default is 1 Maximum Duration s You can set the maximum duration of triggers for that channel after which the trigger is ended even if the Trigger Off Ratio has not been achieved Factory default is 3600 seconds Latch LTA If you set Latch LTA to enabled the LTA is held at the value when the channel triggered and therefore is not updated while the channel is trig gered If you set the Latch LTA to not enabled LTA continues to be calculated and updated while the channel is triggered In either case the trigger will termi nate either when the Trigger Off Ratio is achieved or when the Maximum Duration has expired Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is not enabled 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a res
41. Reindex a Store on page 98 To shut down the Controller gt In the Shutdown page choose Shutdown The LEDs indicate when shutdown has completed see also Section 3 8 2 Status LEDs on page 26 The SuperLED has switched to a slow blinking pattern The MediaLED is green 20 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus The EtherLED is off This occurs about 10 seconds after the display has turned off If the Taurus is in Buffered mode the Controller will normally be shut down already If the Controller is running it is writing buffered data to the medium and will shut down automatically when it is finished writing the data gt To use Shutdown in Buffered mode wake the display first press the centre key for 1 second and wait for the display to start so that you can access the Shutdown option See also Section 3 4 Using the Taurus keypad on page 22 You may wish to do this to ensure any remaining buffered data are written to the recording medium before you remove media or power down the Taurus gt If you submit the Shutdown command from a browser do not refresh the old browser window after the Controller has been restarted as this will resubmit the shutdown command It is possible to do a hard shutdown of the Controller by pressing the centre key for about 5 seconds but this is not recommended A hard shutdown will interrupt various pro
42. Remove a Taurus version from the list Commit Set the currently running version as default Revert Reboot Taurus and run the default version Active Version 2 00 15 Default Version 2 00 15 8 Ensure that the version you want to install is selected in the drop down list 9 Click Install to install the selected firmware The unit will install the firmware the files should finish installing within about 15 to 20 minutes and then reboot auto matically The Taurus will take 2 or 3 minutes to finish rebooting Once the firmware is installed and the unit has rebooted the new firmware is active but it is not yet default You can run the unit with the active firmware but it will revert to the default firmware after a reboot 10 To set the new firmware as Default log in as cent ral go to the Upgrade page and click Commit 11 The upgrade is now complete Optionally you may remove the installation files from the Taurus recording medium In the drop down list on the Upgrade page choose the version you want to delete then click Delete 174 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Ul Pages and Parameters This appendix shows a map of the Taurus UI page hierarchy Section H 1 Taurus UI page map with links to page descriptions and provides a summary of the options available on each UI page Access to some options depends on the level of user access for example you can upgrade the Taurus fir
43. SOH data logs and configuration information can be downloaded as described in Section 11 3 on page 116 Access data on removed recording media Section 11 1 4 on page 109 gt Stream time series data from a Taurus to a Nanometrics acquisition system for example a server running NAQS over an IP connection Section 11 2 3 on page 115 2 7 Install a Taurus Taurus can be installed as a stand alone unit to record continuous data on removable media for extended periods of time or as a network component that allows data down loads data streaming and remote configuration changes while also recording to the storage medium 1 2 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 2 Quick Start 2 7 1 Deployment options The Taurus may be deployed as either a stand alone data recorder or as a network com ponent For stand alone recording where network access is not required typically you would configure the Taurus to run in Buffered mode It consumes less power in this mode as the Controller only runs when the Taurus is recording buffered data to the Store For networked operation you must configure the Taurus to run in Communications mode and configure the appropriate network options In this mode the Controller is running continuously It consumes more power than Buffered mode but allows continuous access via an IP connection In either case installation requires these general steps 1 Plan the p
44. Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Figure 9 3 Add a sensor configuration manually Advanced Configuration Y Sensor Details Sensor Tritium 40 y E Sensor Name frritium 40 SPP Mode LP z Advanced Configuration Y Sensor Details Sensor New gt Trilium 40 aca New gt Trillium 40 Added new Resource Press Apply to test changes or 1 Sensor Details Sensor New gt Trilium 40 aca fest LP Y A onfiguration Y Added new Resource Press Apply to test changes or 1 Sensor Details Sensor New Trilium 40 face Sensor Name SPP Mode XY ZAUVVWY Mode Calibration Mode DENSMIVLyY UNIS VILITNSIS J Sensitivity Value Eoo 0 Sensor Control Lines Mass Auto Centering Era Ec Ez Advanced Configuration Y Changes Applied Sensor Details Sensor test y EJ E Sensor Name fest SP LP Mode SP Y 9 2 1 3 Delete a sensor configuration You can delete a sensor configuration if there are more than one saved on the Taurus 1 Log in as tech or central and go to the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details page In the Sensor drop down list choose the sensor configuration that you want to delete Figure 9 4 Click Del to delete the configuration If you want to restore the configuration at this point click Reset 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 89 Use
45. accurately measure full scale sensor activity the Input Range of the sensor must be greater than the maximum output level of the sensor However if the sensor has a very large dynamic range and the Input Range is set to a large value to capture full scale movement accuracy will be lost when measuring very weak seismic signals Ifyou wish to accurately measure very weak seismic signals the Input Range of the sensor must be set to a small enough value to accurately digitize weak signals If strong seismic events occur that exceed the configured range these signals will be clipped Increased sensitivity lower input ranges also tend to increase overall data volume For example a 3 channel 100sps configuration might generate 3000bps of sampled data If the same system is reconfigured with much greater sensitivity the increased signal activity may cause the average data throughput to rise to 6000bps or more 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 73 User Guide Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing 8 1 2 2 Input Impedance and common mode range You may select between low and high input impedance Low Impedance 43 07kQ This is the factory default High Impedance 29M 2 Low impedance mode has the best immunity to noise pickup and is the preferred mode when using active sensors High impedance mode is provided for use with some pas sive sensors that require a damping load shunt resistor which is h
46. align ment may be necessary hence the name No Alignment To choose the time error reset method 1 Log in as tech or central 80 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing 2 3 In the Advanced Configuration gt Timing page choose an option from the Correc tion Mode drop down list options are discussed above e Gradual Drift e No Alignment To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 8 2 3 Digitizing on startup with GPS lock In order to correctly time stamp the digitized data GPS lock is required on startup It may be important that Taurus does not even start digitizing until good time quality that is GPS lock is reached However there may be situations when digitized data are desired even if GPS reception is not available or not sufficient for example testing setup demonstration Taurus has the ability to accommodate both situations The Digitizing Needs GPS Lock option can be used to select one of these two modes Note that once the Taurus has started digitizing it will continue to do so even if GPS loses lock later regardless of this setting The factory default is to not require GPS lock on startup before digitizing If you wish to change this setting 1 Log in as tech or central
47. an unob structed view of the sky above 30 elevation angle b Connect the cable to the Taurus GPS connector If you have the optional metal dust caps installed Nanometrics part number 15762 ensure that none of the dust caps are touching the GPS connector as this will create a ground loop 2 If you wish to use a web browser on a PC to configure the Taurus connect the Tau rus to your LAN using the supplied Ethernet cable 15228 or equivalent 3 Insert recording media see Section 10 3 1 Insert and remove recording media on page 99 Recording media supplied with your order from Nanometrics is already formatted to Ext3 For Ext3 formatted media the Taurus will automatically create a data Store on startup using the current Store configuration The Store is the set of files that contains time series and other types of data see also Section 10 2 Data Stores on page 95 For other formatting options see Section 10 3 2 Format recording media on page 101 4 Power up the Taurus a Build a power cable using a power connector from the optional Taurus Connec tor Kit part number 15170 or equivalent see also Appendix B Connector Pinouts b Connect the Taurus to an appropriate 9 to 36 V DC power supply see also Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus The Taurus will start booting up it will take 8 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 2 Quick Start 2 to 3 minutes for t
48. are removed from the Modems tab Control Panel gt Phone and Modem Options before continuing Other modem drivers may confuse XP enough to refuse connection Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Phone and Modem Options Click the Modems tab If Communications cable between two computers is not in the list a Click Add b Choose Don t detect my modem Click Next c Choose Communications cable between two computers Click Next d Choose COM Port Click Next e Click Finish Select Communications cable between two computers Click Properties Click the Modem tab and the set maximum port speed to 57600 Click the Advanced tab Click Change Default Preferences and use these settings a Set port speed to 57600 b Set Flow control to none c Click OK Click OK to return to the Phone and Modem Options Click OK to return to Control Panel 58 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 10 Create the new network connection a Goto Start gt Connect to gt Show all connections and choose Make new connec tion or Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Make new connection b In the Network Connection Wizard click Next c Choose Set up an advanced connection Click Next d Choose Connect directly to another computer Click Next e Choose Guest Click Next f T
49. at the configured amplitude between ramps Options are 10 60 300 600 1800 3600 7200 18000 36000 72000 Factory default is 60 Sine Frequency Hz The sine signal frequency in hertz Float number from 0 01000 to 50 0000 Factory default is 1 0 Pulse Duration The pulse signal segment width in milliseconds Options are 100 1000 10000 Factory default is 1000 PRB Pulse Width The PRB signal unit pulse width in milliseconds Options are 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 Factory default is 1000 Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 7 Sensor Details The Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details page provides options to edit and save basic sensor settings and provides links to related pages Table H 26 See also Section 9 2 Sensor configuration on page 85 Table H 26 Sensor Details page options Parameter Widget Description Sensor Lists the types of sensors and their associated configurations currently saved to the Taurus Factory default is Nanometrics Trillium 40 Add Add a sensor type to the list You can store up to 4 sensor configurations Del Delete a sensor type and its associated configuration from the Taurus You cannot delete an item if it is the only item in the list Sensor Name The label for this configuration used in the Sensor drop down list Alphanumeric v
50. authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For the purposes of this definition submitted means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copy right owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Con tribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Con tributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display pub licly perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form 3 Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevoca ble except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell sell import and otherwise transf
51. been rebooted A normal disconnect works over PPP dial up However when the link is physi cally disconnected the Taurus does not detect it so a new connection cannot be started until after the Taurus has been rebooted 56 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 7 3 4 Configuring a SLIP direct connection 7 3 4 1 The Taurus supports direct SLIP connection via a serial communication cable or trans parent serial modem This section provides the procedure for configuring the Taurus and an example configuration procedure for Windows XP Figure 7 3 SLIP configuration pages Y SN 663 Communications Default Interface Serial Pot v Ethernet Data Streaming ial Port 1 Serial Port 2 i E Advanced Configuration P SH 683 Serial Port 1 wd Advanced Configuration Y SN 683 Serial Port 1 Mode SLIP bd Raw TOMA ee Advanced Configuration Y SN 683 SLIP Speed bps esoo y Protocol sue y Local IP si er ea Remote IP amc Taurus configuration for SLIP connection 1 Log in and go to the Advanced Configuration Communications page Figure 7 3 Ensure the Default Interface is set to Serial Port 1 Section 7 1 1 1 on page 53 Click the Serial Port 1 link Choose SLIP from the Mode drop down list Click the SLIP hyperlink Choose a link speed from the Speed drop down list Choose SLIP from the Protocol drop d
52. button or a Current Choices link Figure H 1 Data Retrieval page showing time series current choices Data Retrieval Data Type Time Series C Time Series By Event C State Of Health e System Logs L System Configuration Current Choices Data Type TimeSeries Change Data Type Channels taurus 0379 banditimeSeries3 Change Channel Start Time 2005 08 22 19 55 54 End Time 2005 08 22 20 00 54 haps Te Data Forrnat none Change Format Network NE Station Info Station STNO1 Change Station Info taurus 0379 banditimeSeries3 BHE Clear All Choices H 7 1 Time Series The Time Series pages provide options to download recorded data to a file Options to delimit the data are grouped on the corresponding linked pages listed below See Sec tion 11 2 1 Extract time series data to a file on page 109 Change Data Type Choose a data type to download Change Channel Choose one or more time series channels Change Time Choose a start date and time and a duration Show Available Times Shows time and gap information for each data band Change Format Choose ASCII Seisan or MiniSEED format The current version cannot download more than 488 MB of data in MiniSEED format or Seisan for mat Use multiple downloads for quantities of data that exceed 488MB Mini SEED files use a 512 byte Data Record Length Seisan downloads use a conversion tool Section 11 1 3 3 Initial setup for extracting to Seisan format on page
53. down list Options are Low Impedance 43 07 k 2 High Impedance 29 MQ with High Impedance options low power or high power Low Impedance is the factory default See also Section 8 1 2 2 Input Impedance and common mode range on page 74 Enable Dither Set Enable Dither to enabled vw or not enabled Factory default is not enabled See also Section 8 1 2 3 Enable Dither on page 74 Software Gain Type in a value for Software Gain Float number from 0 001 to 100 Factory default is 1 See also Section 8 1 2 4 Software Gain on page 75 e Enable Hard Clip Set Enable Hard Clip to enabled W or not enabled 7 Fac tory default is not enabled See also Section 8 1 2 5 Enable Hard Clip on page 75 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 8 1 2 1 Input Range The input voltage ranges represent the differential between the sensor positive and neg ative signal inputs in volts peak to peak The maximum input range is 40 volts peak to peak This represents the case of a differential input signal that at one peak has 10V on the positive input and 10V on the negative input 20 V peak At the negative going peak the differential input is 20 V for a peak to peak input range of 40 V Choose settings as appropriate for your application For example Ifyou wish to
54. files plus the scripts used to control compila tion and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distrib uted need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the exe cutable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable Tf distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly pro vided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However par ties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or dis tributing the Program
55. for the 3 parameters Number of usable satellites PDOP and TDOP are provided by the GPS receiver at the Last update time In order to see what time these 3 parameters correspond to look at the Last update time When GPS is off these 3 parameters and Last update time are not updated They show the last value continuously until the next update arrives after the GPS is back on again GPSSatellites For each channel Acquisition type Azimuth Elevation PRN Signal level Last update time EnvironmentSOH External SOH 1 12 bit voltage input External SOH 2 12 bit voltage input External SOH 3 12 bit voltage input External SOH 4 12 bit voltage input Sensor mass position channel 1 Sensor mass position channel 2 Sensor mass position channel 2 Instrument Supply voltage Temperature NMXbus current external connector Sensor current Serial port current Controller current Digitizer current PowerPC For each data band Packet oldest sequence number Store space used 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 1 7 User Guide Chapter 11 Accessing Data 11 3 1 1 Extract trigger data to a csv file Triggers are included as SOH data which you can extract to a csv file This procedure also applies to download of any individual columns of user selected SOH for example media door status It is recommended that you use predefined down loa
56. from the ds Alignment drop down list UTC After a time error correction the next sample is aligned to Ons exactly This is the factory default option None After a time error correction the next sample is aligned to some fraction of a second as determined by that correction HRD After a time error correction the next sample will have alignment based on the algorithm used in the HRD a previous generation Nanomet rics digitizer You can use this option if you have Nanometrics HRDs in your network so output samples from both Taurus and HRD instruments are synchronized in the same way 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 8 1 2 Front End settings To choose Digitizer Front End settings 1 Log in as tech or central 72 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing 2 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Front End page set parameter values as appropriate for your application options are described briefly in the sections as indicated Input Range Choose an option from the Input Range drop down list units are volts Options are 40 16 8 4 2 Factory default is 40 See also Section 8 1 2 1 Input Range on page 73 Input Impedance Choose an option from the Input Impedance drop
57. in Buffered mode depending on the sample rate seismic signal and noise and number of channels configured for example typically about 30 minutes of data for 3 channels at 100sps Also if the Store is not closed down properly it may need to perform a lengthy reindexing on the next startup see Section 10 2 3 Reindex a Store on page 98 gt On the Shutdown page choose Shutdown Shutdown has completed when the SuperLED switches to a slow blinking pattern note that this is about 10 sec onds after the Taurus display has turned off See also Section 3 3 3 Shut down the Controller on page 20 and Section 3 8 2 Status LEDs on page 26 Do not press and hold the centre key for more than 4 seconds as this will cause a hard shutdown of the Taurus Controller A hard shutdown immediately terminates 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 3 User Guide Chapter 2 Quick Start various processes and may cause detrimental effects such as causing the Store to require reindexing 2 7 3 Sensor configuration considerations 2 7 3 1 Mass auto centre and mass locks Disable the setting Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details gt Mass Auto Centering Auto Center on Red before you connect a sensor that has masses locked Once you unlock the masses you may enable Auto Center on Red 2 7 3 2 Calibration Before a sensor can be calibrated the Taurus must be properly configured for the installed sensor Co
58. manager settings 1 Log in to the Taurus as tech or central 2 Open the Advanced Configuration gt Power page and enter the appropriate values for your system See Table H 35 on page 206 for valid parameter values Factory default values are for 12V lead acid batteries and assume short power cables To protect your equipment confirm the appropriate values for your power system and the maximum voltage tolerance of your sensor before setting these parameters 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 40 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus Figure 4 3 Power manager configuration page kw Advanced Configuration Y Power Battery Low mV fos Hysteresis Low mV freno Delay Low ms Bo Battery High mv e000 Hysteresis High mV Bso0o Delay High ms b 1 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 41 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus 42 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Changing a Taurus Configuration This chapter provides overview information about Taurus configuration storage and management and basic procedures for changing a configuration parameter 5 1 Configuration format and storage Configuration changes that have not yet been applied are
59. on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the cop yright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work con taining the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term mod ification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Pro
60. pop up k Click Properties 1 Choose Communications cable between two computers COM x m Click Configure and use these settings i Set Maximum speed bps to 57600 ii Ensure all check boxes are un checked iii Click OK to close the Modem Configuration dialog n Click the Networking tab i Choose PPP Windows 95 98 NT4 2000 Internet connection default ii Un check all items except Internet Protocol TCP IP and QoS Packet Scheduler 0 Choose Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties p Choose Use the following IP address and set it to the Remote IP address con figured on the Taurus q Click Advanced and use these settings i Set Use default gateway on remote network to enabled ii Set Use IP header compression to not enabled iii Click OK to close the Advanced TCP IP Settings dialog r Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog s Click OK to close the ComputerName Properties dialog 3 Connect using a PPP connection a Ensure the Taurus has been powered up and Serial Port 1 is connected to the appropriate Windows COM port b Open Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections and choose Computer Name for example Taurus PPP c In the Connect Taurus PPP dialog box use these settings i Type pppuser in the User name box ii Type beaver16 in the Password box d Click Connect If it succeeds a connection icon will appe
61. selected day The graphical links at the top of the page rw E open the previous and next Day pages It defaults to either the current or the most recently selected day or the last day on the Month calendar view depending on your previous selections The Refresh link updates the page There is a Data Availability gt Text page for each of Time Series data and Other data These pages show data availability and gap information A gap can be either a data gap data packets are missing or a time tear a time jump with no missing packets for example caused by a time adjustment after an extended GPS reception outage or both for example after the power has been disconnected for an extended period H 6 4 1 Time Series The Data Availability gt Text gt Time Series page shows a text summary of the available time ranges of data for each time series channel band the number of data gaps and time tears and the quantity of data as both units of time and as the percentage of space used in the Store The band name links to a page showing details about all gaps for that band The Refresh link updates the page Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 182 id User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 6 4 1 1 Time Series band Each Data Availability gt Text gt Time Series gt band page shows details about availa bility for that band The page shows the quantity of data as the percentage of space used in the S
62. sensor from the Sensor drop down list and configure the settings as appropriate for the sensor factory defaults are for the Nanometrics Trillium 40 If the sensor has configurable operating modes these two settings can be used to control the sensor operating mode s These mode selections will only take effect 1f the sensor control lines have been configured properly see step 3 SP LP Mode Choose the operating mode of the sensor either short period SP or long period LP Factory default is LP XYZ UVW Mode The orientation of the sensor elements Choose Set to UVW to indicate a triaxial seismometer this will run the calibration on each channel separately Options are XYZ UVW Factory default is XYZ Calibration Mode The calibration signal mode refer to your sensor manual Options are VOLTAGE CURRENT Factory default is VOLTAGE Needs Power Indicate whether your sensor needs power active sensors or not passive sensors It is used as an input for sensor status See Table H 1 Status page options on page 177 Options are enabled W not enabled Detect Sensor Presence When this feature is enabled the Taurus will detect whether the sensor is drawing current this feature works only for sensors drawing more than about 8mA It is used as an input for sensor status See Table H 1 Status page options on page 177 This information is also availa ble as Instrument SOH see Section 11 3 1 Extract Sta
63. stored in a temporary cache associated with the browser session If the browser session is closed any changes that are not yet applied are discarded Use the Previous button to move back through con figuration pages to preserve unapplied changes during a session see also Table H 12 Advanced Configuration page options on page 191 Applied changes to a configuration are stored in volatile memory on the Taurus Restarting the subsystem where the changes have been applied will erase the applied changes You must commit applied changes to make them permanent The committed configuration is stored in the internal non volatile memory on the Tau rus as well as in the Store on the removable recording media The internal non volatile memory is used so that when the recording media are removed or the Taurus is power cycled the configuration is not lost The Store also holds a configuration audit trail of all changes since that Store was created The configuration may be downloaded from the Taurus and uploaded to a differ ent Taurus The configuration audit trail may be downloaded for reference but it is not a valid configuration for upload The downloaded Taurus configuration is in RDF Turtle format For information on Turtle see http www ilrt bris ac uk discovery 2004 01 turtle For information on RDF in general see http www w3 org RDF 5 2 Configuration pages See Appendix H UI Pages and Parameters for a descrip
64. terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant permission to use the trade names trademarks serv 1ce marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor provides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License 8 Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including neg ligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for dam ages including any direct indirect special incidental or cons
65. the Controller has been restarted as this will resubmit the shutdown command 208 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09
66. the configuration from your Taurus to your file system You can upload this configuration to other Tauruses H 13 1 General The Advanced Configuration gt General page provides options to change miscellaneous settings Table H 13 Table H 13 General page settings Parameter Widget Description UI TimeOut min The time delay in minutes before Taurus shuts down the display and Interactive mode and reverts to the configured Running Mode Options are 10 20 30 60 120 Factory default is 10 This parameter is overridden by UI activity and data downloads as described in Section 3 1 2 Interactive mode on page 17 Apollo Log Verbosity The level of detail of the Apollo log Options are Info Verbose Debug Info is normal operation messages Debug is all messages Factory default is Info Running Mode The operating mode of the Taurus after Interactive mode ends Options are Buffered and Communications This option is also in the Configuration page Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 92 User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 13 General page settings Continued Parameter Widget Description Soh Report Interval s The SOH sampling rate in seconds including some internal SOH and the 4 External SOH channels see also Section 3 8 5 1 on page 30 Integer from 5 to 3600 Factory default is 60 Post Data Interval ms Do not change this settin
67. the lines local2 var log ppp daemon var log ppp Some versions of syslogd eg on SunOS demand that those be tabs not spaces between the two parts on each line Some editors refuse to insert tabs and convert them to spaces The syslogd shipped with most recent distributions of Linux do not seem to care but Be warned Then to tell syslogd to actually log the information do killall 1 syslogd 7 3 7 Configuring a PPP direct cable connection The Taurus supports a mode to test streaming over PPP by connecting directly from a PC However the Taurus is only listening for connect requests it does not attempt to connect to a PPP server This section provides the procedure for configuring the Taurus for PPP direct connection and an example configuration procedure for Windows XP Typically you would use SLIP for a direct connection Section 7 3 4 on page 57 7 3 7 1 Taurus configuration for PPP direct connection 1 Quer cO COL es Connect the hardware and remove potentially conflicting settings a Build a serial cable and connect to your PCs working COM port normally COM I For example use a DB 9 connector and the connector from the optional Taurus Connector Kit part number 15170 See also Appendix B Connector Pinouts If your link drops frequently use a serial cable having a PC serial connector DB 9 with pins 7 8 RTS CTS shorted and pins 1 4 6 CD DTR DSR shorted Some motherboards PC hardware requ
68. to GND the differential input is Vem Vair 2 Vem tC Vait 2 Vait Therefore gain to a single ended signal is the same for differential and the common mode component is half of the single ended input C 6 Sensor cable wiring lists Table C 3 provides guidelines for sensor cable wiring for connecting Taurus to various sensor types Confirm the pinout for your sensor using information from the sensor manufacturer before building your cable 1 42 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconnection Table C 3 Sensor cable wiring lists e qeo Josuas y oiu ING eq jsnu 1008Au00 9 90 eireudojdde ue seseo esou ui os iewod pajenBa eJinbei s epoui Josuegid3 eulos pue ez vg4 sonewsuny eui pue s1osues zueuue Z doo punoJf e ejeaJo IM yeu ejqeo eui ufnojui pajosuuos ase yjoq ji os pue snine ay apisu pue sJosues seues oyW 2 eui uioq ur punojJ8 eubis o pajosuuos Ajeujojul si punoJ 91607 1 SO ON O N 3 el Azi H vo M AZ 1 N MS9IS 1 MsTvO GND dod N QNO HO L qiiHs r TlaHS T13HS QNOHO q as as as aol aol aol TI3HS SHS S WOO HMd y 9 NOD HMd H S NO H 0L GND H3MOd A OL NIA X 0L HMd 5 Nid NaS G S Ael ris AeL s s lazi 5 OF At HSMOd 9 OF NIA M OL HMd
69. too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free soft ware and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect
70. will operate once Interactive mode is off See Section 3 1 3 and Section 3 1 4 3 1 1 Configure the running mode Buffered or Communications 1 Log in as tech or cent ral Section 6 1 1 Logging in to the Taurus on page 48 2 Go to either the Configuration page or the Advanced Configuration gt General page and then choose an option from the Running Mode drop down list Options are Buffered and Communications For a description of each of the running modes see Section 3 1 3 and Section 3 1 4 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 3 1 2 Interactive mode Interactive mode is on only while the display is active that is until the configured UI timeout expires or you click Turn Off Display in the Shutdown page The Controller is on continuously in this mode and allows access over an IP connection Once Inter 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 7 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus active mode ends the Taurus operates in the configured running mode Buffered or Communications See also Section 3 3 5 Set the UI timeout display timeout on page 21 Interactive mode will be on until the configured UI timeout expires with these excep tions Each time you make a selection change a setting click a button choose a page from the mai
71. 0 Sine Frequency Hz The sine signal frequency in hertz Float number from 0 01000 to 50 0000 Factory default is 1 0 Pulse Duration The pulse signal segment width in milliseconds Options are 100 1000 10000 Factory default is 1000 e PRB Pulse Width The PRB signal unit pulse width in milliseconds Options are 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 Factory default is 1000 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart To start a calibration go to the Sensor page and click Start To stop a calibration in progress click Abort Ensure you have disabled mass auto centring before you start a calibration see step 4 on page 87 in Section 9 2 1 1 Edit an existing sen sor configuration 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 93 User Guide Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors 94 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Recording Data This chapter provides an overview of Taurus data storage and procedures for working with data Stores and the recording media See also Chapter 11 Accessing Data 10 1 Data flow Data are put into Nanometrics Protocol packets NP packets The Taurus buffers the NP packets for all data types and writes them into the Store on the removable media a CompactFlash card or an IDE ha
72. 0Selected Columns options sssaaa eaea 118 B 1 Sensor connector receptacie o oooococccoco eee 130 B 2 GPS antenna connector receptacle oococcoccocccocooc 132 B 3 Power connector receptacle 00 tet e ees 132 B 4 Serial USB connector receptacle 000 cect eee 133 B 5 Ethernet connector receptacle 0 0 eee tees 134 B 6 External SOH connector receptacle 0000 cece eee 134 B 7 NMXbus connector receptacle liliis 135 B 8 USB connector receptacle liliis eee 135 C 1 Typical passive sensor cable desigO ooooooccococococ 139 C 2 Typical active sensor cable design 0 000 cect tees 140 F 1 Apollo Light options without a Store location and after a Store has been opened 164 F227 Ghoos a SIORe a enti a RA a MEA Acad ete dita Bahk 166 F 3 Specify a Taurus from a multi Taurus Store for retrieving log and SOH data 166 G 1 Upgrade options before and after uploading a t gz file to the Taurus 174 H 1 Data Retrieval page showing time series current choices 184 xii Tables 3 1 Status ColOUl si ros ie oco p rect e olde lem de dae 25 3 2 SuperLED states oo Lex ia 27 3 3 EtherLED SHOS atermin Bel eae dini Tae tta urbert 28 3 4 MediaLED states gir il A e ERA RR AAA 29 6 1 Userpermissions llli 47 6 2 Default root passwords 0 cee ee eae 51 8 1 Taurus time definitions 0
73. 1 GND DRAIN 1 P1 N Y V P2 A CH2 WHT P1 A Y V P2 S CH2 BLK P2 T CH2 GND DRAIN P1 P X U P2 a CH3 GRN P1 B X U P2 P CH3 BLK P2 R CH3_GND DRAIN P1 T CAL_SIG P2 N CAL1 BLU P1 U W_CALEN P2 Z CAL1 CTRL4 BLK P1 SHELL P2 SHELL DRAIN P1 J V CALEN P2 CAL2 CTRL5 YEL P1 K U CALEN P2 Y CALS CTRL6 BLK Oo oO OO ol OW WO WI NINI NIAI AJ OO oO a ou BR HR HR c0 ce cnm N N P1 SHELL P2 SHELL DRAIN P1 S W MP P2 K SEN_SOH1 BRN P1 F V MP P2 X SEN SOH2 BLK P1 SHELL P2 SHELL DRAIN P1 E U MP P2 J SEN SOH3 ORG P1 V AGND P2 B CH1 GND BLK P1 SHELL P2 SHELL DRAIN P1 H PWR P2 F SEN_V RED P1 G PWR P2 D SEN_RTN WHT P1 SHELL P2 SHELL DRAIN P1 D UVW TX P2 H CTRL1 RED P1 C MC RX P2 W CTRL2 GRN P1 R CTRL_REF P2 V DGND DRAIN P1 SHELL P2 b CHGND BRAID P2 N CAL1 P2 M CAL2 P2 M CAL2 P2 L CAL3 Depends on cable type this example shows Nanometrics cable 13050 x 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 144 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconnection C 4 Other considerations Some other factors to consider when designing sensor cables gt Ensure that the cable length does not exceed sensor requirements for capacitive loading gt Ensure that the peak current requirement of the sensor does not result in a voltage drop along the cable which takes the power supply voltage below the minimum required at the senso
74. 100sps Sample rates 10 20 40 50 80 100 120 200 250 500 sps Software gain User configurable 0 001 to 100 High pass filter User configurable 0 001 to 1 0Hz 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 23 Appendix A Specifications A 3 Sensor support Sensor types Broadband active and short period passive Control lines 6 typically used for Cal enable mass centre and mass lock unlock Logic level configurable High 5V 12V high impedance Low OV high impedance Mass position Mass position monitoring 10V range Sensor power Supply power pass through to sensor 9 V to 36V DC Protected against short circuit Sensor power can be switched on off from the user interface Calibration signal e Ramped sine wave Pseudo random binary Pulse signal Calibration control User interface local or remote Calibration mode Voltage or current Serial interface Digital serial sensor managment interface for Nanometrics Trillium seismometers feature planned for a future Taurus firmware release A 4 Timing subsystem Timing system Internal VCXO clock disciplined to GPS Timing accuracy lt 100us GPS receiver Internal 8 channel or 12 channel GPS antenna External active antenna 3 3V 100mW Duty cycle Software configurable A 5 State Of Health SOH Continuously recorded SOH
75. 108 Change Station Info Edit station information for the downloaded data file headers You can change Network Name Station Name and Channel Names Clear All Choices Reset all options to the defaults 1 84 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 7 2 Time Series By Event The Time Series By Event pages provide options to retrieve data from a Taurus using information from an event list The event list may be a file that you upload to the Tau rus or information for a single event that you enter into a text form The Taurus calcu lates arrival times for various phases that are applicable to the event selected You may then download the data for available events See Section 11 2 2 Extract seismic data to a file by event from an event list on page 111 Options to delimit the data are grouped on the corresponding linked pages listed below Change Data Type Choose a data type to download Change Channel Choose one or more time series channels Change Time Choose a different start date time and duration The initial time is set automatically on the Change Time By Phase page Show Available Times Shows time and gap information for each data band Change Time By Phase Choose a start time and duration automatically using the available phase data uploaded with the event Change Format Choose ASCII Seisan or MiniSEED format The current versi
76. 2 Qt Embedded Free yes Section E 4 GNU GPL on page 152 Apache Commons FileUpload no Section E 2 Apache License Bouncy Castle no Section E 3 Bouncy Castle License on page 152 Jetty no Section E 2 Apache License IwIP no Section E 6 Modified BSD License on page 157 mab5 js Section E 5 md5 js License BSD License on page 157 OpenSSH no Section E 7 OpenBSD License on page 158 E 2 Apache License Apache License 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 49 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means i the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall
77. 3 245 223 50 1 194700 Decimation 20 15 2 H of Coefficients 165 63 497 80 0 638233 Decimation 15 5 5 of Coefficients 165 187 223 100 0 604233 Decimation 15 10 2 of Coefficients 59 69 113 223 120 0 515800 Decimation 5 5 5 2 of Coefficients 173 95 223 200 0 303867 Decimation 15 5 2 H of Coefficients 187 73 223 250 0 243100 Decimation 15 4 2 H of Coefficients 123 65 223 500 0 123700 Decimation 10 3 2 15148R5 2007 02 09 Open Source Free Software Information The Taurus software includes open source free software components see Table E 1 License information for each such component is included in the sections as indicated You may request from Nanometrics the source code for derived components see Chapter 1 Introduction for contact information the remaining open source code may be obtained from the original developers E 1 Availability of open source free software components Table E 1 List of open source free software components Software component Source code available from Nanometrics See this section for license information Das U Boot yes Section E 4 GNU GPL on page 152 Epson video driver yes Section E 4 GNU GPL on page 152 JFFS2 driver yes Section E 4 GNU GPL on page 152 Konqueror Embedded yes Section E 4 GNU GPL on page 152 Linux Kernel yes Section E 4 GNU GPL on page 15
78. 4 x 5 earth lug screw Low high voltage disconnect Software configurable Peripheral power output Typical over current limit threshold Sensor SEN V SEN RTN 1000mA NMX Bus NMXBUS NMXBUS RTN 1000mA Serial S PWR S PWR 750mA A 14 Environmental Operating temperature For CompactFlash recording option e 20 C to 60 C For IDE disk drive recording option 5 C to 55 C Storage temperature 40 C to 70 C Humidity 0 to 100 non condensing with media door closed under 90 with media door open Operating altitude For IDE hard drive 60m to 3000m 200 feet to 10000 feet No limit for operating with CompactFlash card Dimensions Width 147mm Length 264mm Depth 60mm Weight 1 8kg Construction Machined aluminum case Weather resistance IP67 with media door closed connectors occupied by the appropriate cable connector or sealed with the optional factory installed dust caps Nanometrics part number 15762 or equivalent and the self sealing pressure relief screw torqued to hand tight 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 127 Appendix A Specifications A 15 Regulatory compliance Emissions EN55022 1998 CISPR22 1997 modified FCC Part 15 2004 Subpart B Class A Immunity EN55024 1998 CISPR24 1997 modified 1 28 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Connector Pinouts
79. 5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 65 Appendix F Apollo Light Utility The next time you start Apollo Light it will by default point to the last Store used if it is still available See also Section F 2 1 Initialize the Store location on page 164 Figure F 2 Choose a Store E Apollo Store Selection Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt OA A Qsearch xqFevores Qeda A Ey S Ww El Address ja http localhost pages central storeSelector page Apollo Store Selection Store Directory Store File ID taurus 0016 Instrument ID taurus_0016 To point to another Store select one of its files and press Change Store CAnmxistore taurus 0999 Browse S OE Figure F 3 Specify a Taurus from a multi Taurus Store for retrieving log and SOH data E Apollo Store Selection Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back GA search Favorites meda C4 Ed Sp Ww El Address la http localhost pages central storeSelector page instruments taurus 0113 Apollo Store Selection IMain Store Directory C nmx store soni deg ile 1D taurus 0113 O O Data Availability Store File ID taurus 0113 Data Retrieval Instrument ID taurus_0113 To point to another Store select one of its files and press Change Store Browse Change Store taurus 01 13 y taurus 0113 taurus 0110
80. 8 MB Seisan downloads use a conversion tool that you install on your PC from the Taurus on the initial download see Section 11 1 3 3 Initial setup for extracting to Seisan format on page 108 Subsequent downloads to Seisan format will run the conversion automati cally if you choose Open it with the default application or equivalent in the browser download window Save will save the file with the extension ms2seisan you can run the conversion program on this file for exam ple double click on the file e ASCII 9 Review the settings you have chosen and either download using these settings or change the settings gt Click Download to save the data to a file using the current settings For MiniSEED and ASCII formats save the file to your PC For Seisan open the file This will run the conversion program and save the file to a Seisan REA subdirectory for that station for example C Seismo REA STNO1 2005 10 gt To change the settings click the link to return to the appropriate settings page change the settings then click Next to proceed through the settings pages to the 1 1 4 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 11 Accessing Data Download page For time series by event data settings pages and the corre sponding links include Change Data Type Choose a different data type to download Change Channel Choose one or more time series channels Change Time Choo
81. CP IP SLIP PPP and HTTP As a portable unit Taurus can be deployed to record continuous data for extended peri ods of time For example when recording 3 channels at 100sps up to 600 days of data can be recorded using a 40GB 1 8 hard disk drive A CompactFlash card may also be used as an alternative to a hard drive for example to use at more extreme temperatures or altitudes or to realize optimal power consumption Media are removable for easy data retrieval from the field The extensive storage combined with low power consump tion make the Taurus ideal for long term unattended data acquisition 1 2 About this User Guide Note Please refer also to the release notes for the version of firmware you have installed on your Taurus This User Guide provides quick setup and installation information procedures for operating and configuring the Taurus and reference information Part 1 Getting Started provides an overview of setting up the Taurus and general pro cedures for operating the Taurus Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Quick Start An overview of basic procedures and installation Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus General instructions for operat ing the Taurus 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 3 User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Part 2 Using the Taurus provides detailed procedures Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus Grounding considera
82. Calibration Mode on the Sensor Details page this control line will not be available for any other configuration option It will be reserved for calibration current return Ctrl Line 6 pin Y Control line options include Unused Assert Unused Deassert Ch 1 Cal Enable Ch 2 Cal Enable Ch 3 Cal Enable SP LP On SP SP LP On LP XYZ UVW On XYZ XYZ UVW On UVW Mass Center Mass Lock Mass Unlock Factory default is Ch 3 Cal Enable If you have configured calibration for current mode Calibration Mode on the Sensor Details page this control line will not be available for any other configuration option It will be reserved for calibration current return Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons The Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details gt Mass Auto Centering page provides options to initiate mass centring automatically when the mass positions exceed config urable thresholds for sensors with that capability Table H 28 The Sensor page shows mass position status Section H 9 on page 189 Table H 28 Mass Auto Centering page options Parameter Widget Description Sensor Lists the types of sensors and their associated configurations currently saved to the Taurus Factory default is Trillium 40 Add Add a sensor type to the list You can store up to 4 sensor configurations Del Delete a sensor type and its associated configurat
83. Configuring the Digitizer and Timing This chapter provides overviews of Digitizer and Timing system settings and proce dures for changing these settings 8 1 Configuring the Digitizer Digitizer settings are grouped on two pages under Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer Main and Front End Figure 8 1 There is also a set of pages to define trigger detec tion Triggers Figure 8 2 on page 77 Figure 8 1 Digitizer configuration pages weal Advanced Configuration P Advanced Configuration Y Digitizer Digitizer Main Eront End Main Eront End T s Triggers Gs E zl f Previous S apei J comme Reset k Advanced Configuration Y Advanced Configuration Y Main Front End Sample Rate Hz 250 y Input Range ve y Output Channels 3 Input Impedance Low impedance y Enable DC Removal E Enable Dither B DC Removal Cutoff Hz p oorooo00 Software Gain ay Frames Per Packet k Enable Hard Clip Sample Alignment UTC M Previous Apply Reset ES CENA 8 1 1 Main settings 1 Log in as tech or central 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 71 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing 2 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Main page set parameter values as appropriate for your application Sample Rate The sample rate in hertz samples per second on the sensor sig nal Choose an option from the Sample Rate drop down list Option
84. G IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 57 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information 2 2 2 UCB LBL Copyright c 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved This software was developed by the Computer Systems Engineering group at Lawrence Berke ley Laboratory under DARPA contract BG 91 66 and contributed to Berkeley All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the dis tribution All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contribut
85. H A NJS 3 a6 a6 a6 T1SHS ar ar ar 6 6 138 s 6 anga y an9a A 6 3901 x 6 MSyAd y 6 1H19 NJS 9 a8 ag ag SHS vt WO H 8 MOOINN M 8 MSIYO y 8 dS XH OW 9 z419 NIS M v dINVaNN 1 8 H31N3O n 8 ZLAV 3 8 XL MAN Gd MELO N3S H az az az T1SHS ar QNO 9 Z QND IVNDIS N Z SAND dit GNDOV A GND IHO 8 Z SON MA 1 2 WSOdM N 2 dN nN 3 HOS NaS f ag ag ag T1SHS 9 SOdW SN f 9 A SOdA 19 dN 4 ZHOS N S X 9 SOJN HAA 5D 9 m SOdn 1 9 dWM S IHOS N3S M as as as T1SHS S NIYO M4 L sTH19 z1vol 9 S N3TvO N M 91H19 1vO A G NIVO MN S ly18L9 1W9 Z1 S N31VO9 A f a810 9 zvo IW S VOM d e1vol N elvo Nas 1 ar ab ar SHS vb vo a vr 399 3 bv NJIVO H3A H WOOO W v N3IVO M N v1HIO L1VO Z 11v9 IN v IWOA N kvo IN Yo NaS N vb WwolVvi ye Wo 3 v DIS wo d 1von O tv 9IS IVO 1 I1VO NSS N ae ae ae ae ae ae ae GND HO Y SNVHL H X N WOOL 4 3 die M3 die X re n x 4a HO d SNVHL 9 X 11 inolt Jale 3 31 N3 31 X aj y X d HO e az az az az az az az GND 2HO 1 z bONO1 Q0 z A a z wool a z N alz S N alz A H Z M A V ZHO S z ONO1 2 z A viz 1001 v z N MEA S N Era A 91 73 N A N 2H0 V al al al al al al al GND IHO 8 LO LHSA d H Z a H WOOA Ja L Z g H 193A g H Z 9 H W Z _ W IHO o LE 1H3A 3 I Z m INOA 9 Lt Z vil H3A v Z g H
86. H 11 Configuration page options Parameter Widget Description Running Mode The operating mode of the Taurus either Buffered or Communications This option is also in the Advanced Configuration gt General page Section H 13 1 on page 192 190 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 11 Configuration page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Output Channels The number of channels 0 to 3 This option is also in the Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Main page Section H 13 8 1 on page 202 Sample Rate The sample rate in samples per second This option is also in the Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Main page Section H 13 8 1 on page 202 H 12 System Info The System Info pages show the revision information for this Taurus Click the appro priate page link Firmware or Hardware to view the information Firmware page Indicates the version of Taurus software that is installed and the version information for each of the firmware components In a browser this page also has a link to download the revision information for both the hardware and firmware as a text file Section 11 3 4 on page 120 Hardware page Shows the serial number and revision information for each of the Taurus sub assemblies H 13 Advanced Configuration The Advanced Configuration page provides links to va
87. HOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORM ANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFEC TIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 99 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIA BLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PAR TIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PRO GRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to atta
88. I Taurus Digital Ground PF or PigTail is Li acceptable Anal T E External SOH na og iM po stall instrument Ethernet POC OC OOOO 1 Bhernet X GPS Connector isolated from chassis Y 9 GPS Antenna GPS Laptop or PC A mela or plastic Controller Ground E External GPS RU Serial Ground Or modem U USB hag USB Digital Ground not yet suppo rted 7 USB Primary Ret metal or plastic Alternate Taurus chassis ground connection to ground lug if sensor is not grounded Possible connection to ground lug for Controller ground loops should be avoided but not at the cost of safety Figure 4 2 Hole for earth lug screw Threaded hole for M4 x 5 screw 36 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus The Taurus has chassis ground analog ground digital ground and primary input power return Primary power return is completely isolated from chassis analog and digital ground Sensor power is connected directly to the input power and is thus iso lated from digital and analog ground Chassis case ground is connected to the analog ground of the Digitizer subsystem There is a single point connection from analog ground to the Digitizer subsystem digital gr
89. M E eM M 195 TDMA iaa da ia a di due meter ee ia ond 196 Serial POM ainia a seti veta excedit ea Do ath uated Ge Sun qu di aad 196 Discovety code aes A Ede ri Deets eel Pee Na Ea 196 Securty tos Mach te excipe Pasos wy aes Mada basa ag aree acorde aaNet 197 Playback sibarita t xe eee she ad whet see HERE 197 TIMING CONfQUrATION ar ae aha EIS RU dx CER UE oe aes 198 Calibration aiu cresta i DA a OUR oh ae aan athe eae IT ae n 198 SensoriDelailS 3 42 se ee ae tiga S tr eras wai M ied tera Eae ta etd esed ite Tea d 199 Sensor Gorntr l Lines aaa aia OR Abe ae Pelee Ses 200 Mass Auto Centering o ooocococco ete eee 201 DigitlZer eta rA Rigi NER RE LEGE RAE NA PR Ede pde os 202 Mlle e sr dco a Seca utr spat ea sud acc ntfs nre Gas i eta d 202 Front Erde std era ed re e dus ew ata ses do ed eara e E e d Ron an ics 203 THIJS dt e Rui Ra a a ae a 204 INPUt Filter bois obe pem t pr S Er x OI PUE gan o PE re Sh 204 Detectors ao Thor stie beet T ex scit metit OA CO 205 POWER isa s teet UN Maru berita V riot E AS oc operi e Ls us 205 Upgrade s se re eee perm puc Vrae rana uo eh ante atte Rete anta 206 Contents Eog In Eog Ostia lia datada daa Change Password 00 0 e cette eee eee Shutdown Figures 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 9 3 10 4 1 4 2 4 3 5 1 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 9 4 9 5 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 Taurus physical features 6 te
90. ND CAL SIG V N CAL CALEN CAL UVW 1 V CTRL MC RX sw CTRL_REF DGND 4PWR SEN V4 PWR PWR RTN PWR SEN_RTN SHELL CHASSIS SENSOR TAURUS When either of the sensor or digitizer power supplies are isolated there is nothing to constrain the common mode voltage of the sensor outputs with respect to the digitizer ground For optimal shielding performance the digitizer channel grounds are connected to the drain wires of the inner shields at one end of the cable only Therefore it is of critical importance that the analog ground of the sensor AGND be separately con nected to the analog ground of the digitizer CH1_GND The other two digitizer chan nel grounds CH2_GND and CH3_GND should only be connected to their respective shield drain wires and not to AGND The control signal reference CTRL_REF serves as the reference voltage for all of the Trillium control signals U_CALEN V_CALEN W_CALEN UVW and MC This should be connected to the appropriate ground for the control signal outputs on the dig itizer In the case of the digitizer this is the digital ground DGND 1 40 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconnection Table C 2 Typical active sensor wiring list From To Colour Run Conn Pin Name Conn Pin Name P1 L Z N P2 U CH1 RED 1 P1 M Z N P2 C CH1 BLK 1 P2 B CH
91. NPStore createStoreFile NPStore java 345 at ca nanometrics store NPStore init NPStore java 262 at ca nanometrics store NPStore lt init gt NPStore java 226 amp at ca nano metrics store NPStore instance NPStore java 206 amp at ca nanomet rics apollo MissionControl openStore MissionControl java 304 amp at ca nanometrics apollo MissionControlCentral body MissionControlCen tral java 82 amp at ca nanometrics apollo MissionControl run Mis sionControl java 823 amp at ca nanometrics apollo MissionCon trol main MissionControl java 891 amp This is normal It indicates that a Store directory has not yet been identified Until you point to a Store the menu will not include the Data Availability or Data Retrieval options Once you have selected a Store Section F 3 3 all of the menu options will be shown Figure F 1 If the Store you selected is corrupted the menu still will not show the Data Availability or Data Retrieval options and the startup win dow may show additional exceptions Figure F 1 Apollo Light options without a Store location and after a Store has been opened File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help a File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help O 6 Q Q9 I7 http localhost pages central status page EA 4 Home Oy Search EJBookmarks O Q Q Q9 71 http localhost pages central status page j m Home OY Search EJBookmarks a a a Apollo M
92. Oldest Sequence Number ed E taurus 0105 band alert Space Used taurus_0105 band alert meta Oldest Sequence Number teem FIAT Alida T 4 Select the start date and time and duration of the data to download then click Next 5 Review the settings you have chosen and either download using these settings or change the settings Click Download to save the data to a csv file using the current settings gt To change the settings click the link to return to the appropriate settings page change the settings then click Next to proceed through the settings pages to the 1 1 6 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 11 Accessing Data Download page For SOH data settings pages and the corresponding links include Change Data Type Choose a different data type to download Change Time Choose a different start date time and duration You can see available times under Show Available Times Change SOH Data Choose a different set of SOH data to download gt Use Clear All Choices if you want to deselect all of the current settings delimit ing the data and return to the Data Retrieval main page Table 11 1 Predefined SOH downloads to csv files Predefined SOH download option SOH data GPSTime GPS receiver status Number of usable satellites PDOP TDOP System clock phase lock Time uncertainty DAC count Time error Last update time The values
93. On SP SP LP On LP XYZ UVW On XYZ XYZ UVW On UVW Mass Center Mass Lock Mass Unlock Factory default is SP LP On SP Ctrl Line 3 pin G Control line options include Unused Assert Unused Deassert Ch 1 Cal Enable Ch 2 Cal Enable Ch 3 Cal Enable SP LP On SP SP LP On LP XYZ UVW On XYZ XYZ UVW On UVW Mass Center Mass Lock Mass Unlock Factory default is Unused Deassert 200 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 13 7 2 Mass Auto Centering Table H 27 Sensor Control Lines page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Ctrl Line 4 pin Z Control line options include Unused Assert Unused Deassert Ch 1 Cal Enable Ch 2 Cal Enable Ch 3 Cal Enable SP LP On SP SP LP On LP XYZ UVW On XYZ XYZ UVW On UVW Mass Center Mass Lock Mass Unlock Factory default is Ch 1 Cal Enable If you have configured calibration for current mode Calibration Mode on the Sensor Details page this control line will not be available for any other configuration option It will be reserved for calibration current return Ctrl Line 5 pin c Control line options include Unused Assert Unused Deassert Ch 1 Cal Enable Ch 2 Cal Enable Ch 3 Cal Enable SP LP On SP SP LP On LP XYZ UVW OnzXYZ XYZ UVW On UVW Mass Center Mass Lock Mass Unlock Factory default is Ch 2 Cal Enable If you have configured calibration for current mode
94. Portable Seismograph 15148R5 2007 02 09 Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 7 3 6 1 Figure 7 5 PPP configuration pages Y Communications Default Interface Serial Port 1 y Ethernet Data Streaming Serial Port 1 Serial Port 2 Dis Advanced Configuration Y SH 583 Serial Port 1 Advanced Configuration SN 683 Serial Port 1 Made SLIP hd Raw d mus WV Advanced Configuration Y SH 683 PPP Speed bps 9600 Local IP SS Remote IP Connection Type det y Modem init string Extra modem init string Ian Authentication Vv Taurus configuration for PPP dial in 1 Log in and go to the Advanced Configuration gt Communications page Figure 7 5 Ensure the Default Interface is set to Serial Port 1 Section 7 1 1 1 on page 53 Click the Serial Port 1 hyperlink Choose PPP from the Mode drop down list Click the PPP hyperlink Choose a link speed from the Speed drop down list Set the Local IP to the IP address of the local PPP interface Set Remote IP to the IP address of the remote PPP interface Soo A OQ n FF Y m Choose dial in from the Connection Type drop down list 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 63 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 10 Set the modem initialization string the entry is split into two parts to reduce clut ter but you may enter multiple commands in one field if you wish a Set Mod
95. Requirements for accessing Store files The Store files must be in a directory that is accessible from your machine All of the files for the Store you are accessing must be present in the same direc tory for example for a Store containing 5 files all of the files from taurus_serialNumber_001 store to taurus_serialNumber_005 store must be present in the directory The Store files must be set to read write gt On Windows right click on the file name choose Properties and deselect the attribute Read only On Linux Unix in the Store files directory enter the command 1s al to check read write status w indicates write permission the files should already show read permission r To set a selected file for write permission enter chmod w filename gt To set all files in the directory to write permission enter chmod w F 3 3 Selecta Store CAS decor o cues Choose Store Selection from the menu Click Browse to search for a Store on your file system Select any one of the files for that Store Click Change Store to point Apollo to the selected Store Figure F 2 If the Store contains data from more than one Taurus choose the correct Taurus before working with logs or SOH data Figure F 3 In the Instrument ID list choose the appropriate Taurus Instrument ID and then click Change Instrument Ensure you have configured the Playback options as appropriate for the data source Section F 3 4 15148R
96. S vertical scale of the channel window MIN smallest sample value of the samples e MAX largest sample value of the samples Viewing SOH status Current state of health SOH information is shown in sev eral locations See Section 3 8 4 Pages showing current status information on page 29 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 05 Chapter 11 Accessing Data 11 1 2 Checking availability of data The Data Availability pages provide options for viewing summaries and details of availability ranges and any gaps gt See Section H 6 on page 181 for a description of the Data Availability page options 11 1 3 Extracting data to files with the Data Retrieval pages You can extract data from the Taurus v a a browser over an IP connection Use the Data Retrieval pages to set the data extraction options described in the sections listed Time series data to MiniSEED Seisan or ASCII delimited by time selections Section 11 2 1 on page 109 Time series data to MiniSEED Seisan or ASCII delimited automatically using uploaded event information Section 11 2 2 on page 111 SOH data and triggers to csv files Section 11 3 1 on page 116 System logs to a log file Section 11 3 2 on page 119 Configuration audit trail toa cfg file Section 11 3 3 on page 119 Figure 11 1 Data Retrieval main page Data Retrieval Y Data Type C Time Series C Time Series By Event S Dat
97. See also Table 11 1 on page 117 Instrument Environment GPS and timing PowerPC External SOH 4 analog SOH channels 12 bit digitized available for user defined purposes Configuration Configuration audit trail Log file All software generated log messages are stored with the data Taurus Portable Seismograph 124 User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix A Specifications A 6 Internal data storage Standard Removable accessed via the media door CompactFlash SanDisk Extreme Series tested up to 4GB capacity with Taurus 1 8 IDE disk drive 20GB to 60GB Duration gt 600 days continuous recording 3 channels 100sps on 40GB IDE drive 30 days on 2GB CompactFlash Recording modes Continuous ringbuffer overwrites oldest data File system Linux Ext3 Storage format Nanometrics Store Streaming data output in Nanometrics NP format extraction to MiniSEED ASCII Seisan A 7 Data retrieval Media exchange Removable IDE hard drive or CompactFlash card Download interfaces 10 100Base T Ethernet serial SLIP or PPP A 8 Real time data communication Interfaces 10 100Base T Ethernet RS 232 serial Port 1 has all RS 232 signals Port 2 has Rx Tx RTS CTS Protocols UDP IP unicast multicast HTTP POST and GET RS 232 serial with IP drivers A 9 Integrated UI LEDs System status tri colour Ethernet communication statu
98. THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 6 Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2 term BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders Markus Friedl Theo de Raadt Niels Provos Dug Song Aaron Campbell Damien Miller Kevin Steves Daniel Kouril Wesley Griffin Per Allansson Nils Nordman Simon Wilkinson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUP TION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
99. TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PAR TIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PRO GRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 2 The 32 bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack c was contributed by CORE SDIS A under a BSD style license Cryptographic attack detector for ssh source code 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 59 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information Copyright c 1998 CORE SDI S A Buenos Aires Argentina All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modifi cation are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRAN TIES ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDIS A BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE Ariel Futoransky futo core sdi com gt lt http www core sdi com gt 3 ssh keyscan was contributed by David Mazieres under a BSD style license Copyright 1995 1996 by David Mazieres lt dm Ics mit edu gt Modification and redistribution in source and binary forms is permitted provided that due credit is given to the author and the OpenBSD project by leaving this copyright notice intact 4 The Rijnd
100. TRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE E 6 Modified BSD License 2 2 Berkeley based copyrights 2 2 1 General Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the dis tribution The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this soft ware without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUP TION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER WISE ARISIN
101. Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide O 2004 2007 Nanometrics Inc All Rights Reserved Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide The information in this document has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be reliable for Taurus run ning firmware version 2 05 x Nanometrics Inc reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice to improve the reliability and function of the product No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of Nanometrics Inc Nanometrics Inc 250 Herzberg Road Kanata Ontario Canada K2K 2A1 Tel 1 613 592 6776 Fax 1 613 592 5929 Email info 9 nanometrics ca WWNW nanometrics ca Part number 15148R5 Release date 2007 02 09 Contents FIQUICS an AN A AE xi E c P c CC O xiii INTO HOT ce Sica oa e S wen 18 ehe rdc e acd d qd qe a e ave 3 Aboutthe Taurus i sss eye AIR Wie ell CODO A d ebd Vea e Red 3 About this User Quide xou et ue Mack ma pesi VOU IRR A RUD OX RR sarao 3 Unpacking the shipment s erbe de Ada A 4 Technical Support bsec de rea va ad Ge bas 5 QUICK Starts ar a a A OLTRE 7 Taurus basic elementS o o o o ooooo s 7 Verify operation of a TauruS 2 6 tees 8 View or change configuration settingS 0 cece eee 9 Making conf
102. Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 93 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Pro gram itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the P
103. Technical support Read the appropriate sections of this user guide and related documents such as firmware release notes before installing or operating the Taurus Portable Seismograph Taurus features as identified in this manual have been tested and are supported by Nan ometrics Use of other capabilities on the Taurus for example SSH general Linux resources is not supported by Nanometrics Technical Support or Warranty Use such additional capabilities at your discretion If you need technical support please submit your request via the Nanometrics customer support site or by email or fax Include a full explanation of the problem and support ing data for example relevant log and SOH files Before returning a unit for repair request an RMA number Customer support site http support nanometrics ca Email techsupport nanometrics ca Fax To Support at 1 613 592 5929 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 5 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction 6 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 2 Quick Start This chapter provides an overview of basic setup procedures Refer to the relevant chapters for more detailed information 2 1 Taurus basic elements Figure 2 1 shows the location and function of basic Taurus physical features and Fig ure 2 2 gives an overview of the Taurus subsystems Figure 2 1 Taurus physical features Connectors see Appendix B Connector A Pi
104. This appendix includes front face views of the Taurus connector receptacles and con nector pinout descriptions See Section A 11 Connectors on page 126 for connector specifications B Note The 4 pin connector above the IDE drive slot is for factory use only 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 29 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix B Connector Pinouts B 1 Sensor Figure B 1 Sensor connector receptacle w CAL2 CTRL5 0 CAL3 CTRL6 SEN_SOH2 CTRL1 SEN_SOH3 1 30 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix B Connector Pinouts Table B 1 Sensor connector pinout Pin Name Function Details U CH1 Channel 1 input 20V differential C CH1 B CH1 GND Channel 1 ground shield Connected to shield ground A CH2 Channel 2 input 20V differential S CH2 T CH2 GND Channel 2 ground shield Connected to shield ground a CH3 Channel 3 input 20V differential P CH3 R CH3 GND Channel 3 ground shield Connected to shield ground K SEN SOH1 Sensor state of health input 10V single ended X SEN SOH2 signals Referenced to DGND J SEN SOH3 H SEN CTRL1 Sensor control signal outputs 0V 5V 12V high impedance w SEN CTRL2 Referenced to DGND G SEN_CTRL3 N SEN_CAL1 Sensor calibration signal outputs 4 5V single ended M SEN CAL2 Referenced to DGND in voltage B mode and to CALz in curre
105. Using the Taurus Powering the Taurus Changing a Taurus Configuration Configuring Taurus User Access Configuring Taurus Communications Configuring the Digitizer and Timing Controlling and Configuring Sensors Recording Data Accessing Data Powering the Taurus This chapter provides overview information for planning Taurus grounding and power and procedures for configuring power manager settings 4 1 Taurus power consumption Power consumption of the Taurus varies with factors such as the operating mode and GPS receiver duty cycle See also Section 3 1 About the Taurus operating modes on page 17 and Section A 13 Power on page 127 for specifications In Buffered running mode Taurus will write data to the Store on the recording media at approximately 30 minute intervals for 3 channels at 100sps The aver age power consumption will typically be 750mW when using CompactFlash and with the GPS Duty Cycle mode configured to Automatic Instantaneous power consumption is higher than 750mW for the minute or two when the data in the Digitizer buffer are being written to the Store Power consumption will be higher with a higher sample rate since the buffer fills more frequently Power consump tion will be correspondingly lower for lower sample rates In Communications running mode the Controller is running continuously This consumes more power about 2 3W when CompactFlash is used than Buffered mode In Interactive mode
106. a Availability C State Of Health Data Retrieval 9813 1 C System Logs E System Configuration 11 1 3 1 Navigate Data Retrieval pages Options you have chosen on data retrieval pages are stored in a temporary cache If you use browser options or main menu selections to navigate your changes will be dis carded Use these navigation options to preserve your changes gt Use the Next button to navigate away from a Data Retrieval page within a session This is comparable to the Previous button for configuration sessions see Table H 12 Advanced Configuration page options on page 191 gt The Current Choices hyperlinks will open other pages within a session for exam ple if you want to go back to a page and edit a setting If you make changes to the page always use the Next button to continue not another Current Choices link to ensure the new changes are preserved 1 06 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 11 Accessing Data Figure 11 2 Data Retrieval page navigation Data Retrieval Y Channel Selection Select Channel Overall Time Range IV taurus 0105 banditimeSeries1 2005 10 31 22 23 16 775 2005 1 Iv taurus 0105 banditimeSeries2 2005 10 31 22 23 16 765 2005 1 IV taurus 0105 banditimeSeries3 2005 10 31 22 23 16 775 2005 1 lt Use the Next button and the Current Choices links to navigate in a session Current Choices Data Type TimeSeries Change Da
107. a known teleseismic event The travel time tables used in Taurus and Apollo are calculated using the Tau algorithm using the TauP Java Package http www seis sc edu TauP outputs files for any velocity model the user wants Taurus and Apollo use the IASPEI91 Default Model which is com monly used for teleseismic events Note There are two potential issues with uploading NEIC Epic Search Com pressed event files 1 If you try to upload a very large file containing hundreds of events the browser may either take a very long time to load the file or may crash 2 If the file contains any events that do not use the required date and time syntax this will prevent the file from loading Only a small number of historic events might not use the required syntax Valid syntax options include the following where the blocks of data are each separated by a single space YYYY YYYY MM YYYY MMDD YYYY MMDD HH YYYY MMDD HHmm If you choose to edit the file be careful to maintain the data column structure as validity is checked only for the date and time syntax 1 On a browser over an IP connection choose Data Retrieval from the menu 2 Choose Time Series By Event then click Next Available channels are listed with the data time ranges 3 Click to select one or more channels then click Next This opens a page with options to either upload an event list or enter information for an event manually into a form 4 To upload an event list Fig
108. ael implementation by Vincent Rijmen Antoon Bosselaers and Paulo Barreto is in the public domain and distributed with the following license version 3 0 December 2000 Optimised ANSI C code for the Rijndael cipher now AES author Vincent Rijmen lt vincent rijmen esat kuleuven ac be gt author Antoon Bosselaers lt antoon bosselaers esat kuleuven ac be gt author Paulo Barreto lt paulo barreto terra com br gt This code is hereby placed in the public domain THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCURE MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIA BILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEG LIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 5 One component of the ssh source code is under a 3 clause BSD license held by the University of California since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley code Copyright c 1983 1990 1992 1993 1995 The Regents of the University of California All r
109. age listing the set tings you have chosen for this download 4 Review the settings you have chosen and either download using these settings or change the settings gt Click Download to save the log information to a text file using the current set tings gt To change the settings click the link to return to the appropriate settings page change the settings then click Next to proceed through the settings pages to the Download page For system configuration audit trail information settings pages and the corresponding links include Change Data Type Choose a different data type to download Change Time Choose a different start date time and duration You can see available times under Show Available Times gt Use Clear All Choices if you want to deselect all of the current settings delimit ing the data and return to the Data Retrieval main page 11 3 4 Download Taurus system information to a id file You can download system information such as firmware and hardware version infor mation from the Taurus to a text id file gt In the System Info gt Firmware page click the Download link then select a destina tion and save the file 11 3 5 Download the current configuration to a cfg file You can download the current configuration from the Taurus The downloaded file is a valid configuration that can be uploaded to a Taurus See Chapter 5 for general infor mation on working with the Taurus configuration G
110. ails A External SOH Port 1 2 5V DC referenced to pin G SOH_REF B External SOH Port 2 C External SOH Port 3 D External SOH Port 4 G External SOH reference Do not ground E External SOH power 3 3V 10mA F External SOH power return Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 34 User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix B Connector Pinouts B 7 NMXbus Figure B 7 NMXbus connector receptacle NMXBUS SHIELD NMXBUS_RTN Table B 7 NMXbus connector pinout Pin Function NMXbus power and signal filtered unregulated voltage NMXbus power and signal return switched overcurrent protected NMXbus cable connection sense referenced to NMXBUS RTN NMXbus cable shield OCO OoO U gt B 8 USB This refers to the mini USB connector socket in the media bay Figure B 8 USB connector receptacle 1 2 3 4 5 Table B 8 USB connector pinout Pin Function Details 1 Standard USB power 5V DC 100mA 2 Data 3 Data 4 On The Go Sense 5 USB ground 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 35 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix B Connector Pinouts 1 36 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Sensor Digitizer Interconnection This appendix describes considerations and requirements for connecting the Taurus to a seismometer using the Nanometrics Trillium seismometers as an exam
111. ain Apollo Main 1 Main Welcome to Apollo Light Store Selection TAN E Data Availability Use this application to retrieve data from Taurus data stores Data Retrieval Welcome to Apollo Light Use this application to retrieve data from Taurus data stores F 2 2 Exit Apollo Light To exit Apollo Light choose Exit from the menu 1 64 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix F Apollo Light Utility F 3 Using Apollo Light You can use Apollo Light to view what data are available in a Store on your file system and to extract the data F 3 1 Working with data from multiple Tauruses You can have Stores from different Tauruses in the same directory Apollo Light will use the Store ID in the file name to access the correct files The Store ID uses the serial number of the Taurus that recorded data into the Store In rare cases a single Store may contain data from multiple Tauruses see Section 10 2 1 1 About appended Stores on page 96 In that case the Store ID in the filename uses the serial number of the last Taurus that recorded data into the Store Each set of log and SOH data in a multi Taurus Store is associated with the Taurus that originally recorded those data Therefore you must also specify the Instrument ID of the Taurus before retrieving log or SOH data for that Taurus data set All time series data can always be retrieved regardless of the Instrument ID setting F 3 2
112. ait for the message Changes Applied to be shown at the top of the page gt If you want to undo applied changes see Section 5 4 2 gt Once you are satisfied that you want to make the changes permanent click Commit to save the new configuration Wait for the message Changes Applied Successful Commit Commit includes Apply so you may commit changes without having to apply them first gt Some configuration changes require a Controller restart after Commit to activate the saved changes There will be a message shown in the Ul if a restart is required In the Shutdown page click Restart 5 4 2 Undo applied changes To undo applied changes you must restart the subsystem where the applied changes are stored gt Use Shutdown Restart to undo applied changes made in these Advanced Con figuration pages Playback Communications Security and the parameters Ul TimeOut and Apollo Log Verbosity in the General page gt You must power cycle the Taurus to undo applied changes made in the Configura tion page and in these Advanced Configuration pages Timing Calibration Sensor Details Digitizer Power and the last 4 parameters in the General page See Sec tion 4 3 4 Power cycle the Taurus on page 39 5 5 Downloading and uploading configurations The complete configuration can be downloaded from the Taurus to an external file sys tem Valid configuration files can be uploaded to the Taurus to replace the existing con
113. all systems are running including the display so this con sumes the most power about 3 3 W This operating mode is not a running mode it is on only temporarily while the display is on Power consumption as discussed above refers to the Taurus only Power consumption of peripheral devices such as the sensor or devices connected to the NMXbus serial port or the External SOH is in addition to these stated averages 4 2 Grounding a Taurus installation The most appropriate grounding plan will depend on your application and the installa tion environment This section outlines some general information you may take into account when planning grounding for a Taurus installation See also Appendix C Sen sor Digitizer Interconnection Figure 4 1 shows the Taurus ground architecture and Figure 4 2 shows where to con nect an earth lug to the Taurus use an M4 x 5 screw 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 35 User Guide Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus Figure 4 1 Taurus ground distribution and architecture po NMXbus not yet supported Primary Power Return 9 r return Power retu Sensor Primary Power Return Taurus Shield H FEN Analog Sensor Taurus Ground Ground Isolation Analog 4 low impedance Hon din igh Ground multi point contact to Digital impedance chassis Reference
114. alue SP LP Mode Choose the operating mode of the sensor either short period SP or long period LP Factory default is LP XYZ UVW Mode The orientation of the sensor elements Choose Set to UVW to indicate a triaxial seismometer this will run the calibration on each channel separately Options are XYZ UVW Factory default is XYZ Calibration Mode The calibration signal mode refer to your sensor manual Options are VOLTAGE CURRENT Factory default is VOLTAGE Needs Power Indicates whether the sensor needs power active sensors or not passive sensors Options are enabled v not enabled Detect Sensor Presence This feature works only for sensors drawing more than about 8mA 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 99 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 13 7 1 Table H 26 Sensor Details page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Sensitivity Units Refer to your sensor manual for the appropriate value Options are V m s V m s s Sensitivity Value Refer to your sensor manual for this value Hyperlinks Links to sub pages Sensor Control Lines and Mass Auto Centering See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of hyperlink behaviour on configuration pages Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons Sensor Control Lines The Adv
115. ame and password and authorization model the access level associated with the authenticated user Access to configuration pages requires user authentication which pages you can access depends on the authorization level of the user ID HTTP requests must be via a browser Authentication for browserless HTTP requests is planned for a future release The Taurus authorization model contains users roles and permissions and their rela tionships as shown in Table 6 1 In this release the authorization model is not editable That is you cannot reassign permissions or roles and you cannot create or delete users You can change the passwords Table 6 1 User permissions Default ete User Role Permissions password factory The factory account is not available for general use central central securityAdmin Configure security Configure system Manage data Store and recording media Command sensor Download all data types Restart Shutdown Upgrade 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 47 User Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access Table 6 1 User permissions Continued User Pera Role Permissions password tech tech maintenance Configure system Manage data Store and recording media Command sensor Download all data types Restart Shutdown user user operator Manage data Store and recording media Command sensor Download all data types Restart Shutdown not logged in not defin
116. anced Configuration gt Sensor Details gt Sensor Control Lines page provides options to set control line parameters for your sensor Factory default values are for a Trillium 40 seismometer Refer to your sensor manual for appropriate values Table H 27 Sensor Control Lines page options Parameter Widget Description Sensor Lists the types of sensors and their associated configurations currently saved to the Taurus Add Add a sensor type to the list You can store up to 4 sensor configurations Del Delete a sensor type and its associated configuration from the Taurus You cannot delete an item if it is the only item in the list Assert On Level Assert line level HIGH_Z ZERO POSITIVE Factory default is ZERO Deassert Off Level Deassert line level HIGH_Z ZERO POSITIVE Factory default is ZERO Positive Voltage Level Positive voltage level PLUS_5 PLUS_12 Factory default is PLUS 5 Pulse Duration s Control pulse duration in seconds 1 3 5 7 10 15 20 Factory default is 1 Ctrl Line 1 pin H Control line options include Unused Assert Unused Deassert Ch 1 Cal Enable Ch 2 Cal Enable Ch 3 Cal Enable SP LP On SP SP LP OnzLP XYZ UVW OnzXYZ XYZ UVW On UVW Mass Center Mass Lock Mass Unlock Factory default is XYZ UVW On UVW Ctrl Line 2 pin W Control line options include Unused Assert Unused Deassert Ch 1 Cal Enable Ch 2 Cal Enable Ch 3 Cal Enable SP LP
117. and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker signature of Ty Coon April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary pro grams If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLEI Copyright O 2005 by the Open Source Initiative Technical questions about the website go to Steve M webmaster at opensource org Policy questions about open source go to the Board of Directors 1 56 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information The contents of this website are licensed under the Open Software License 2 1 or Academic Free License 2 1
118. and Previous buttons H 13 2 1 Ethernet The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Ethernet page provides options to set Ethernet networking parameters Table H 15 See also Section 7 2 Communica tions over Ethernet on page 54 Table H 15 Ethernet page options Parameter Widget Description Mode The method Taurus will use to acquire an IP address Options include DHCP Link Local Static IP and None disable Ethernet Factory default is DHCP Static IP Address The IP address assigned to the Taurus applicable only if Mode is set to Static IP Factory default is 127 0 0 1 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 93 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 13 Table H 15 Ethernet page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Static Subnet Mask The network mask for the Taurus Static IP Address Factory default is 255 255 255 0 Static Default Gateway The default gateway address for Static IP Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons 2 2 Data Streaming The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Data Streaming page provides options for streaming data from Taurus Table H 16 See also Section 11 2 3 Stream time series data to a central acquisition server on page 115 Table H 16 Data Streaming page options Parameter Widget Description
119. and enable or disable trigger detection for any channel Each time series channel is associated with the same detector type identifier that is channel 1 detector 1 channel 2 detector 2 channel 3 detector 3 Each channel before passing data to the detector will band pass the data using the trigger input filter You may enable triggers for inactive channels as defined under Advanced Configura tion Digitizer Output Channels although of course there will not be any associated data for any triggers that are detected This could be used to define event information for a Time Series By Event retrieval on a different Taurus Set the detector and filter parameters as appropriate to your site and application using options in the Advanced Configuration gt Triggers pages Figure 8 2 There are vari ous external sources of information on defining trigger parameters in general for example the New Manual of Seismological Observatory Practice IASPEI 2002 pro vides an excellent discussion of this topic see the publisher s site http www gfz pots dam de pb2 pb21 for information on the NMSOP gt Ensure that DC is filtered out for trigger detection If you do not have the DC Removal filter enabled for your seismic channels Advanced Configuration gt Dig 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 75 User Guide Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing itizer gt Main page you must include a high pass fi
120. ap Tolerance drop down list options are 5 min 1 min 30s 1s 500ms none The Refresh link updates the page and the All Channels link opens the main Time Series page H 7 Data Retrieval The Data Retrieval pages provide options to extract data from the Store to a file This section provides a brief overview of the Data Retrieval pages See Chapter 11 Access ing Data for detailed information and procedures One data download can be run at a time Any subsequent download requests are proc essed pending completion of the download in progress Use the Next button to navigate within a download session to ensure that your choices are preserved For all data types the data retrieved are all of the samples from the specified start time up to but not including the sample at the specified end time The main Data Retrieval page provides options to choose the type of data to extract to a file Data types include Time Series Time Series By Event State Of Health System Logs 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 83 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters System Configuration To set options for the download for a new session or new data type click Next If any data download selections have already been made a summary of the current choices is shown at the bottom of the page for example Figure H 1 To set options for a subse quent session with the same data type you may use either the Next
121. ar in the Windows notification area with the message Taurus PPP is now connected e Test the connection by pinging the Local IP address configured on Taurus from a command prompt 7 4 Data Streaming You can stream time series data over either an Ethernet or Serial Port 1 SLIP PPP connection to a destination such as a NAQS server See Section 11 2 3 Stream time series data to a central acquisition server on page 115 68 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 7 5 Discovery The Taurus can be configured to send out brief UDP messages that allow other pro grams including Apollo to discover other devices running Apollo on the local area network This feature will have more application once Apollo Central is released The Taurus shipping default is to have Discovery enabled You may wish to change this setting to disabled for example to eliminate possible associated Alert messages 1 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Discovery gt page disable the option Enable Dis covery 2 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 69 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 70 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter8
122. arameters H 13 5 Timing configuration The Advanced Configuration gt Timing page provides options to set basic timing parameters Table H 24 See also Section 8 2 Configuring Taurus timing on page 78 Table H 24 Timing configuration page options Parameter Widget Description GPS Duty Cycle Mode The GPS receiver duty cycle Options are Always On Automatic Every 10 minutes Every 30 minutes Always Off Factory default is Automatic Automatic is the most efficient setting for Taurus power consumption gt Do not use the Always Off setting Correction Mode Sample timing correction method Options include Gradual Drift No Alignment Factory default is No Alignment Digitizing Needs GPS Lock Defines whether GPS lock is required before the Taurus starts digitizing on startup Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is not enabled Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 6 Calibration The Advanced Configuration gt Calibration page provides the sensor calibration con figuration options listed in Table H 25 See also Section 9 3 Configuring calibration on page 91 Table H 25 Calibration page options Parameter Widget Description Calibration Type The type of calibration signal to use Options are Sine Pulse PRB Factory default is Sine Channel n Choose wh
123. are the Sensor sta tus bar and the Power status bar see the relevant entries in Table H 1 Status page options on page 177 System sensitivity calculated using the sensor Sensitivity Value from the Advanced Configuration Sensor Details page and the Digitizer Input Range and Software Gain from the Advanced Configuration Digitizer Front End page It is expressed in counts per unit of velocity or acceleration based on the selected Sensitivity Units from the Advanced Configuration Sensor Details page A waveform of the sensor output for each channel with scaling options and wave form selection options as described in Table H 2 Waveform page options on page 180 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 83 User Guide Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Figure 9 1 Sensor page Sensor Giga joow m System Sensitivity 1 2E3 cnti m s Calibration EES Er Time 30s Scale Auto y Pause Show One e ERE kabi U ui inde a Lasia a OT L AAA 9 1 2 Sending commands to the sensor You can control some aspects of the sensor operation interactively with options in the Sensor page You can configure the Taurus to perform mass auto centring 9 1 2 1 Manual sensor control You can send commands to the sensor using these options in the Sensor page Mass Center You can send a mass centre command for sensors that support remote automatic mass centring It will centre all
124. asurements This is the default setting Every 10 minutes Every 30 minutes You can use a constant duty cycle either Every 10 minutes or Every 30 minutes It is recommended to verify that the time error does not exceed your requirements when the GPS receiver 1s switched back on after these time intervals Use the GPS Time SOH file to inspect the time error Always On Always On will use approximately an additional 200mW but will provide the most accurate timing Since in this mode GPS time is always available System Time can always be kept close to UTC such that the time error of the Taurus is typically not more than a few microseconds 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 8 2 2 System time correction The System Time is kept close to GPS Time when GPS is available Even when the GPS receiver is duty cycled and the System Clock is free running for a while the time error is regularly small enough so that it can be smoothly reduced to near zero levels by running the clock slightly off frequency until perfectly resynchronized The time module is in Fine Lock if the time error which is the difference between System Time and GPS Time remains small If a time error develops that is larger than a pre set limit the time module goes into Coarse Lock which steers the clock back faster Large
125. ation ooooocooconccor nh 44 Change the configuration llis eh 44 Contents Undo applied changes i cselum ERE EEWRR rt Rhee his e ERACHER 45 Downloading and uploading configurations llle 45 Download a configuration from the Taurus lille 46 Upload a configuration file to the Taurus llle 46 Saving default configurations liliis 46 Configuring Taurus User Access oooooccococccoc eee 47 User access via the Taurus Ul 0 eee 47 Logging in to the Taurus o o ococcoccoo eee ae 48 Standard login zii rad a Sala daa Ae eho Pages eae Ovis de 48 Quiciclogip ener oia a teat behead Rl isch m eae ders 49 Logging off of the Taurus decoracion e Liee AA e ERES 50 Changing passwords 0 0 ccc hn 50 Other access protocols FTP telnet and SSH 0 0 0 0 50 Default passwords ie Re ts epe Mee Ea BERN EL E e aa 51 Configuring Taurus Communications 000 0 eee eee ees 53 Taurus networklng ick Gace tada oi bie eee DRIN e ees 53 Packet FOULING az iti dint pee Ohi a PERS iS 53 Set the packet routing default interface 0 0 0 ees 53 Communications over Ethernet ooooococccoc eee 54 Configuring Ethernet settings 0 0 0 0 cece eh 54 Communications over serial 0 000 e eee 55 Protocols 0 22 mu eRe evel A A er ee ce e e 55 Flow controll 200s A Ue ee Ba Me See a le ae ne tes 56 Bandwidth requirement for data s
126. aurus will automatically reduce the rate at which NP packets are transmitted based on the configured speed of Serial Port 1 The throttle rate is set to also allow for other TCP traffic to get across the link and to account for PPP overhead 7 3 2 1 Bandwidth requirement for data streaming over a serial link Even with flow control the serial link will have bandwidth limits which if exceeded may affect data availability When data streaming over a serial port the following con dition must be true If it is momentarily violated buffers will temporarily allow data streaming without data loss but a data delay may be noticed Number_bytes_required_to_be_sent lt Maximum_number_bytes_that_can_be_sent Maximum_number_bytes_that_can_be_sent Serial_Port_Speed 0 90 10 Number_bytes_required_to_be_sent Output_Channels Sample_Rate_Hz Bytes_per_sample Packet_overhead Packet_overhead 51 64 Frames per packet 28 60 Frames per packet g The packet overhead is the combined overhead of the Steim 1 NP and UDP IP over heads If you are using TDMA over serial take into account that the maximum number of bytes that can be sent will be limited additionally by the size of the Taurus TDMA slot 7 3 3 Limitations These limitations are planned to be addressed in a future release After a client PC disconnects from the Taurus in PPP direct mode another client PC cannot connect to the Taurus until after the Taurus has
127. beg tiu Ghee Danial ate 125 SOMWANG SM MT MULT 125 Connector ncaa artic car Vade ges v tete vd mes acea o Vasca vaa et e ada at v pb 126 POLIS 5 ones ud esiti Dee Nha tton Der teet uus eaters OA DAA eerie 126 POWO Penn em rcm ce MEf NA 127 Environmental saz 5e UI Lucre Ra EHE ERR doe a aus Ne e RUPEE UP LEM 127 Regulatory compliance llle 128 Connector PINOUTS as AS oe Aa i eap o e nU Ue RO 129 SEN O ANNO 130 GPS Ant nn s estirar as ata aaa 132 DOWOI att o a mut ai cl agin tm Ata Gag atu ALIE ME La UE 132 Serial USB cti AA Sis Goad E a Soak PR a A 133 Ethernet N cette eos re oO eMac acy Usha ner hte tc caret clio 134 Exter al SOM 425 atat a RI Tea areata ie Seah Resa De o AUR LA ID 134 INIVIXDUS codicia EPIIT ria e Doo 135 USB ndr m bt lea Goa dened Dal Sacra ye ide lia PESE ae Sd Lor Ad Da 135 Sensor Digitizer Interconnection 00 2 eee ee ee 137 Circ tt descriptionis d se cea A ERE 137 Biel ir4 EP EE 137 SOS wee dre PA eat eS S lait AT O PA E WAS EET 137 Shielding aats misie p T Ee bet AA eds er E owe d enint 138 vii Contents Gro ridirig slua aonde bed Patents al nube uapltamesuu a eid ere 138 General considerations 0 0000 cece e 138 PaSSIVE SCNSOMS cis Wels lege no PERG ra Sedo Weide E pana 139 ActiVe SernsorS aon sng ERR ane beg are a eae Yaga Pk Rl deed e RC td 140 Other considerations wee gers dad ee are sd uei e ud e EE Ferd art a 142 Digitizer operation with single end
128. ble and wait for the LED on the top of the Taurus to start blinking then release the centre key 4 3 3 2 Bypass the Battery Low High voltage disconnect settings on startup If the supply voltage exceeds either of the configured voltage disconnect settings that is it is either lower than the Battery Low value or higher than the Battery High level the Taurus will not power up You must use this method to power up the Taurus gt Connect the power while the media door is open Having the media door open when power is first applied disables the battery voltage level checks and forces the Taurus to start up Once the Taurus has started you can reconfigure the Battery Low High disconnect to the appropriate values for your power supply see also Section 4 4 4 3 4 Power cycle the Taurus Shutdown page options apply only to the Controller subsystem If you need to power cycle other subsystems for example to undo an applied configuration Section 5 4 2 on page 45 use one of these methods 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 39 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus If you have physical access to the Taurus 1 In the Shutdown page click Shutdown 2 Wait until the SuperLED switches to a slow blink pattern 0 5s on 5s off then disconnect the power cable 3 Reconnect the power cable If you must power cycle the Taurus remotely gt Go to the URL http TaurusIPAddress 8080 firmware and then click Rebo
129. cable is short In configurations that have long GPS cables and lightning protection an overall system design approach must be taken which balances the grounding requirements with the protection requirements This approach requires an understanding of the Taurus grounding the sensor grounding power supply grounding and local site grounding 4 3 Powering the Taurus See these sections for related information Section A 13 on page 127 for Taurus power specifications Section 4 2 and Appendix C for grounding information Section 3 3 on page 19 for Taurus startup definitions and options Section 4 4 1 on page 40 for power manager configuration options Section 9 1 2 on page 84 for turning sensor power on and off via the Taurus UI Note It is recommended that you use Shutdown to power down the Controller before disconnecting the power This will preserve data presently cached in the buffer and will allow the data Store to close gracefully See also Section 3 3 3 Shut down the Controller on page 20 4 3 1 Choose a power supply and cable gt Choose an appropriate power supply for your application See Section A 13 on page 127 for the Taurus power specifications gt Build a power cable using a power connector from the optional Taurus Connector Kit part number 15170 or equivalent see also Appendix B Connector Pinouts 38 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chap
130. cesses and may cause detrimental effects such as causing the Store to require rein dexing 3 3 4 Restart the Controller Use Restart to reboot the Taurus after committing configuration changes that require a Controller restart to become active for example Communications changes Security changes The Taurus continues to buffer data during a restart In the Shutdown page click Restart If you submit the Restart command from a browser do not refresh the old browser window after the Controller has been restarted as this will resubmit the restart command 3 3 5 Set the UI timeout display timeout If you have not made a selection in the UI within a configured period of time the dis play will turn off and the Taurus will revert from Interactive mode to the configured running mode either Buffered or Communications A selection is any of these actions change a setting click a button choose a page from the main menu click a hyperlink or have a download of data in progress This applies for selections made either by press ing the centre key on the Taurus keypad or by using a browser 1 Log in then choose the number of minutes for the UI timeout in the Advanced Configuration gt General page UI TimeOut min 2 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taur
131. ch them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found One line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WAR RANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSO LUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are wel come to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w
132. chosen and either download using these settings or change the settings gt Click Download to save the data to a csv file using the current settings gt To change the settings click the link to return to the appropriate settings page change the settings then click Next to proceed through the settings pages to the Download page For SOH data settings pages and the corresponding links include Change Data Type Choose a different data type to download Change Time Choose a different start date time and duration You can see available times under Show Available Times Change SOH Data Choose a different set of SOH data to download gt Use Clear All Choices if you want to deselect all of the current settings delimit ing the data and return to the Data Retrieval main page 11 3 2 Extract system logs toa log file You can extract the system logs from a Store to a file in text format The Apollo DSP and ARM logs are downloaded to one combined file This procedure describes data extraction using the Data Retrieval page options 1 Ona browser over an IP connection choose Data Retrieval from the menu 2 Choose System Logs then click Next This opens a page with options to select the start date and time and duration of the log information to download 3 Set the time period parameters then click Next This opens a page listing the set tings you have chosen for this download 4 Review the settings you have chos
133. ckets Apply the setting enable Stream NP Packets v and Apply again Oth erwise it may take some time before the data begin streaming to NAQS depending on how busy the Taurus Controller is processing queued requests 1 Ensure that the Taurus is running in Communications mode Section 3 1 on page 17 and that the communications options are set as appropriate Chapter 7 Con figuring Taurus Communications 2 In the Advanced Configuration Communications Data Streaming page change these settings as appropriate Stream NP Packets Set Taurus to stream data to the specified destination enabled W not enabled Factory default is not enabled IP Address The address of the streaming destination for example a NAQS server a valid IP address in dotted decimal format If you are streaming to NAQS you must have NpToNmxp running on the NAQS server See also the NpToNmxp User Guide Nanometrics docu ment number 15648 Port 4 The port number used for NpToNmxp if the destination is a NAQS server Factory default is 32004 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 11 5 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 11 Accessing Data 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 11 3 Retrieving other data There are various other types of information besides time series data that yo
134. configured in Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Main Output Channels and Sample Rate Hz or in Configuration Output Channels and Sample Rate Hz Store Type The space used as percentage of configured Store size on the active recording medium The recording media type is configured with options on the Store Tools page Store Time Left Avg Time in Store Store Time Left is the estimated number of days of recording space remaining in the active Store at the current sample rate Once the Store has wrapped that is it has recorded data to the configured Store capacity and started to record over old data it changes to a continuously recalculated average quantity of data in the Store expressed as the number of days or hours of data The current IP address of the Taurus in dotted decimal format The assignment method for the IP address is configured in Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Ethernet Mode Time Shows the current time as yyyy mm dd HH mm ss uses Controller time see Table 8 1 Taurus time definitions on page 79 GPS options are configured in Advanced Configuration gt Timing Battery The power supply level in volts Battery options are configured in Advanced Configuration gt Power Power The average power consumption of the Taurus in watts This will include power consumption of any externally connected devices such as a seismometer serial dev
135. connection Section 7 3 5 1 1 Slot Duration plus Slot Start must be less than or equal to 100 Enter a number from 1 to 99 Factory default is 80 5 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart Minimum slot size The minimum slot size is determined by the largest frame that may be transmitted over the serial link The minimum slot size in milliseconds is defined as follows minSlotSize guardTime MTU bitsPerCharacter paddingMargin dataRate 1000 For example with 35 ms slot guard time not configurable to other values in this release a530 byte Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 10 bits per character 8 data bits 1 start 1 stop no parity 10 byte stuffing margin and 9600 bps the minimum slot size would be minimum slot size 35 530 10 1 1 9600 1000 642 ms 7 3 6 Configuring a PPP dial in connection via dial up modem The Taurus will accept a PPP initialization request from a client using a dial up mode This section provides the procedure for configuring the Taurus for PPP dial in and an example configuration procedure for Windows XP To connect to the Taurus via PPP a fixed user name pppuser and password beaverl6 is used to authenticate the PPP client Taurus being the PPP server This is planned to be configurable in a future release 62 User Guide Taurus
136. cording to the Controller Status page Time Time see Section 3 2 on page 19 for a description SOH page Time of the Controller The Controller resynchronizes its time to System Time once per minute when it is running GPS Last The System Time when the GPS data GPS Map tab Timing Update Time including the GPS time was last updated page Update Time Satellite Last Update Time The System Time when the GPS receiver last updated the information for a specific satellite GPS Satellites tab Tim ing page Last Updated 8 2 1 GPS receiver duty cycle The Taurus has options to set when the GPS receiver switches on 1 Log in and go to the Advanced Configuration gt Timing page Caution The Always Off mode is used only for factory testing Do not set the GPS Duty Cycle Mode to Always Off 2 Choose a valid option from the GPS Duty Cycle Mode drop down list e Automatic Automatic is the most efficient setting for Taurus power consump tion The duty cycling strategy is that the GPS receiver is switched on until fine lock is reached in the System Clock then switched off until the estimated time uncertainty reaches a predefined limit such that the expected time error is still 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 79 User Guide Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing less than the 100 us specification The uncertainty estimate is based on clock drift and temperature me
137. ction options as on the Waveform page see Table H 2 on page 180 Table H 10 Store Tools page options Parameter Widget Description Active Media A read only identifier of the active media type either IDE IDE hard drive or CF CompactFlash card Active Store Size The capacity of the active Store This is configured at the time the Store is created Store Space Used A read only field showing the amount of space used in the active Store other medium Available A read only field that indicates whether an Ext3 formatted recording medium is available in the other slot Options are Yes and No or not formatted Switch Media A wizard to switch recording of data onto a Store in the other media slot if available This does not move existing data between these Stores Format media A wizard to format the recording medium in the other slot All data and partition information on the medium will be erased Reindex Store A wizard to reindex the entire Store on the active medium Delete Store A wizard to replace the current Store on the active medium with a new Store All data in the old Store will be erased H 11 Configuration The Configuration page provides configuration options that are assumed to be accessed more frequently Table H 11 You must log in as tech or central to use this page Each of the options is also available in the Advanced Configuration pages Table
138. d If you disabled Auto Mass Center on Red you may now enable that option 11 If the Taurus is to operate in Buffered mode ensure that Running Mode is config ured to Buffered before you leave the unit 12 Ensure that the Taurus is sealed environmentally Section 2 7 4 on page 14 13 Ensure before you leave the Taurus installation that the SuperLED is blinking green The SuperLED blinking green indicates that all systems are operating as configured and no problems are detected gt If the SuperLED is blinking yellow or red use the Status page indicators to assist with finding the problem step 5 on page 9 If the display is off press the centre key for about 1 second and wait for the display to start up It will open to the Status page 1 6 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Operating and Maintaining Taurus This chapter provides an overview of the Taurus operating modes and describes the basics of how to operate and maintain the Taurus 3 1 About the Taurus operating modes The Taurus has three operating modes including an Interactive mode and two running modes Interactive mode is a temporary state invoked automatically while the display is active Use this mode for managing the Taurus via the display and keypad and for allowing IP access while the Taurus is running in Buffered mode See Section 3 1 2 The configured running mode Buffered or Communications determines how the Taurus
139. d Configuration gt General page Use the Soh Report Interval s parameter to set the SOH sample rate in seconds Enter a number between 5 and 3600 Factory default is 60 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart The SOH information shown on the Ul pages is updated every 5s independent of the Soh Report Interval setting 3 8 6 System logs The Taurus system logs provide operation messages to the configured levels of detail System logs are recorded to the Store You can download the system logs to a file and then view the information in any text editor See Section 11 3 2 on page 119 for information on downloading the system logs 3 8 6 1 Set the log verbosity You can set the level of detail for the Apollo and ARM system logs the DSP log ver bosity is not configurable 1 2 Log in and go to the Advanced Configuration gt General page Use the logType Log Verbosity parameters to set the level of detail in the Apollo and ARM logs Options are Info Verbose and Debug Factory default is Info To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 3 8 7 Alert messages The Alerts pages show a list of occurrences such as startups shutdowns and major
140. d in the Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 2 page 7 3 1 Protocols Serial Line IP SLIP A simple IP over serial protocol with very little overhead The Taurus uses a 1500 byte frame size Compressed SLIP CSLIP SLIP with TCP IP header compression This will decrease the TCP IP header from 40 bytes to 7 bytes but has no effect on the 28 byte UDP IP headers 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 55 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications Point to Point Protocol PPP A more advanced IP over serial protocol that is used in modem communications The Taurus supports two connection methods Dial in The Taurus will accept dial up connections from remote devices This feature has been tested with USRobotics V 90 56K external Faxmodem e Direct This mode may be used to test streaming over PPP by connecting directly from a PC However Taurus is only listening for connect requests it does not attempt to connect to a PPP server Typically you would use SLIP for a direct connection The Taurus automatically provides a PPP client its local and remote IP addresses for the PPP connection for both dial in and direct Time Division Multiple Access TDMA Static channel allocation for multiple Tauruses to communicate with a Nanometrics comms device such as a Janus Communications Controller over SLIP links 7 3 2 Flow control For Data Streaming the T
141. d parameter is found Applied changes that have not yet been committed are discarded when you restart the associated Taurus subsystem Controller only or any other component see Section 5 1 Configuration format and storage on page 43 See Section 5 4 2 Undo applied changes on page 45 for discarding complex transactions those that contain many applied changes Some changes require a commit and restart before they become active If a restart is required a message will be displayed Commit Commit all applied changes and any subsequent new changes that have accumulated in the temporary cache Committed changes are permanent Commit includes Apply Nothing is committed if an invalid parameter is found Some committed changes require a restart before they become active If a restart is required a message will be displayed Reset Discard all unapplied changes from the temporary cache Browse This option is available in a browser Browse for a Taurus configuration file on your file system Upload This option is available in a browser Upload and apply the selected configuration file to your Taurus You can upload a partial configuration without affecting the rest of the configuration for example predefined sensor configurations from the sensors directory See also see Section 5 5 2 Upload a configuration file to the Taurus on page 46 Download This option is available in a browser Download
142. d set tings on page 72 Table H 31 Front End page options Parameter Widget Description Input Range The voltage range for the sensor input in volts peak to peak The input voltage ranges represent the differential between the positive and negative signal inputs Options are 40 16 8 4 2 Factory default is 40 Input Impedance Options are Low Impedance High Impedance low power High Impedance high power Low impedance is 43 07kQ 0 2 high impedance is gt 9MO Factory default is Low Impedance Either Low Power or High Power mode can be used with High Impedance mode for all values of Input Range except 40 Vpp for which the Low Power setting is not applicable See also Section 8 1 2 2 Input Impedance and common mode range on page 74 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 203 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 31 Front End page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Enable Dither Adds a very small random signal to the input signal of the Digitizer to eliminate idle tones Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is not enabled Software Gain Set the Digitizer gain to attenuate or amplify the sensor input signal to a level that will optimize use of the Digitizer dynamic range Float number 0 001 to 100 Factory default is 1 Enable Hard Clip Limits the output samples of the Digitizer to the specified limits
143. des a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Deriva tive Works in at least one of the following places within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or within a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational pur poses only and do not modify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifi cations or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and dis tribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution inten tionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the
144. ds to extract certain SOH data in context as described in Section 11 3 1 on page 116 1 On a browser over an IP connection choose Data Retrieval from the menu 2 Choose State Of Health then click Next 3 Leave the SOH type to download as User Selected csv and then choose Trigger from the Available Columns list Figure 11 9 The Trigger option will be included in the SOH Available Columns list only if triggers have already been generated Figure 11 9 Choose Trigger as an individual SOH column Select A Group of SOH or Choose A List of Channels User Selected csv Available Columns Selected Columns Nothing Selected taurus_0105 band alert Oldest Sequence Number mi Ead taurus 0105 band alert Space Used itaurus 0105 band alertmeta Oldest Sequence Number taurus 0105 band alert meta Space Used taurus Q0105 band config Oldest Sequence Number xl Currant Choicac 4 Click Add to add Trigger to the Selected Columns list Figure 11 10 Once an Available Column has been added to Selected Columns additional options for moving selections is included Figure 11 10 Selected Columns options Selected Columns Trigger Move To Top Add gt Move Up Move To Bottom 5 Click Next 1 1 8 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 11 Accessing Data 6 Select the start date and time and duration of the data to download then click Next 7 Review the settings you have
145. e Choose an event of interest from the list click the associated radio button then click Next Figure 11 6 1 1 2 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 11 Accessing Data Figure 11 6 Choose an event from an uploaded list Data Retrieval Y Label Time Location Depth Magnitude Manually Enter an Event Label Time Location Depth km yyyy MM dd HH mm ss lat lon depth a 5 To enter event information into the form a Type the event information in the text fields Label A name for the event as an ASCII string of any length Time Event time as an ASCII string of the format yyyy MM dd HH mm ss Location Depth km The location of the event as a comma separated list of the latitude longitude depth b Click the radio button to select the event once you have filled in the event form fields then click Next 6 Select time by phase and related options Figure 11 7 Pre Event Time Number of seconds of data to download preceding the calcu lated start time Start Phase Available phases that you may choose to set a start time automat ically Phase options are loaded according to what would be available for an event at that location relative to the Taurus location at the time the data were recorded Post Event Time Number of seconds of data to download following the calcu lated end time End Phase Available phases that you may choose to set an end ti
146. e 0 lt Trigger Off ratio lt Trigger On ratio Factory default is 5 Trigger Off Ratio The STA LTA at which a trigger ends Float number where 0 lt Trigger Off ratio lt Trigger On ratio Factory default is 1 Maximum Duration s A duration in seconds at which to end a trigger that has not yet reached the Trigger Off Ratio Float number from 0 001 to 3600 Factory default is 3600 Latch LTA Freeze the LTA at the value it had when the trigger started Options are enabled W not enabled Factory default is not enabled Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 9 Power The Advanced Configuration Power page provides options to configure power sup ply parameters such as voltage disconnect levels Table H 35 See also Section 4 4 Configuring power manager settings on page 40 gt Factory default values are for 12 V lead acid batteries To protect your equipment confirm the appropriate values for your power system and the maximum voltage tolerance of your sensor before setting these parameters 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 205 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 35 Power page options Parameter Widget Description Battery Low mV Battery low voltage threshold in millivolts Integer from 9000 to 36000 Factory default is 10500 See also Section 4 3 3 2
147. e 178 for a summary of timing statuses and indicators While data streaming is dis abled HTTP access to the Taurus is still available HTTP access may be erratic depending on the number of collisions on the link due to any significant shift of the Taurus time slot If the Janus system timing status is not good it will not transmit over the serial ports until its timing status is good again While the Janus is not transmitting over the serial ports it will continue to receive data from connected Tauruses and for ward the data to the central site over Ethernet 60 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications Figure 7 4 TDMA configuration pages Y SH 683 Communications Default Interface Serial Port 1 Ethernet Data Streaming Serial Port 1 Serial Port 2 Dised ry Ev Advanced Configuration Y SN 683 Serial Port 1 Mode SLIP hd SUP Raw PPP TDMA Emi 2 Powe ee weal Advanced Configuration P SH 683 TOMA Enable TDMA Frame Lenath ms 4000 Slot Start 9 lo Slot Duration 96 eo Previous eon conne rese 7 3 5 1 Taurus configuration for TDMA Note Fora network that uses a set of half duplex links on different frequencies itis recommended that you configure the radios for priority receive In addition for low bandwidth links you may balance transmission efficiency for data transmission and retransmission requests by set
148. e 7 Taurus subsystems block diagram 6 0 isle 8 Taurus Status Pages titi tie Pots pee ee wae we deed are rae wee 9 Pressure relief screw location lille 15 Mount the GPS antenna shows optional bullet antenna 16 Taurus boot progress screen liliis 19 Taurus keypad TUNCHONS ooooccooocccooo n 22 Taurus main menu i kc rec ern RRE RARA 23 Examples of link and field with focus llle 24 Virtual keyboard for text field entries on the display liliis 25 SuperLED locations rudem va ad ERES EE E 27 Stack of Tautruses ads te cs pru 28 EtherLED location ud hyeme eaters Riles 28 MediaLED location o ooccooccococcon RR E 29 Alerts page example o ooococoocooo e hh 31 Taurus ground distribution and architecture llle 36 Hole for earth lug screw lisse 36 Power manager configuration page sells 41 Advanced Configuration main page options liliis lisse 46 Open the Log In page ooocooccccco hn 49 Configure Quick LOQIN oooococccoo res 49 Choose the packet routing default interface llle 54 Ethernet configuration pages oooccococccccoo e 54 SEP Configuration pages cepere E PEE Reaper m Erdbeben bes 57 TDMA configuration pages oooccoococco RR n 61 PPP configuration pages isses eae 63 Digitizer configuration PageS 0 eR 71 Trigger configuration pages resse terenie RII 77 Ti
149. e Add Remove and Move x buttons to populate and sort the selected columns Use this option to download trigger information H 7 4 System Logs The System Logs pages provide options to download all system log data Apollo ARM DSP for the selected time period to a text file Options to delimit the data are grouped on the corresponding linked pages listed below See also Section 11 3 2 Extract system logs to a 10g file on page 119 Change Data Type Choose a data type to download Change Time Choose a start date and time and a duration Show Available Times Shows time and gap information for each data band Clear All Choices Reset all options to the current defaults H 7 5 System Configuration The System Configuration pages provide options to download the current system con figuration information to a text file This information is an audit trail of all configura tion changes it is not a valid configuration file see Section 5 5 on page 45 for information on downloading and uploading valid configurations Options to delimit the data are grouped on the corresponding linked pages listed below See also Section 11 3 3 Download the configuration audit trail to a c g file on page 119 Change Data Type Choose a data type to download Change Time Choose a start date and time and a duration Show Available Times Shows time and gap information for this data band H 8 Timing The Timing page includes pages
150. e about 50MB of space on the recording medium 5 Create an upgrade directory on either of the available recording media either an IDE drive or a CF card mkdir mnt media upgrade where media is ide if you are using an IDE harddrive and cf if you are using a CompactFlash card for example mkdir mnt cf upgrade gt Ifthe mnt media directory does not exist it is because the media is not installed properly Do NOT make that directory manually using mkdir Instead power down the unit ensure the media is installed properly and power the unit back on 6 Keep the telnet session running 7 FTP to the appropriate directory on the Taurus IDE or CF Use root for both the login and the password For example ftp root rootGip address of your taurus mnt media upgrade 8 Locate your taurus release 2 xx yy tgz file Upload the file with FTP set for binary transfer to the appropriate upgrade directory on the Taurus either mnt ide upgrade or mnt cf upgrade 9 From the telnet session go to the upgrade directory and untar the files you can press Tab to auto complete directory and file names cd mnt media upgrade tar zxvf taurus release 2 Xxx yy tgz The files should finish untarring within 5 minutes 10 Change directories to the release files directory and then run the installation scripts cd release 2 xx yy taurus install sh The files should finish installing within about 15 to 20 minutes Make sure there are no errors d
151. e calculated end time End Phase Available phases that you may choose to set an end time automatically Phase options are loaded according to what would be available for an event at that location relative to the Taurus location at the time the data were recorded Selected Events Read only information identifying the selected event H 7 3 State of Health The State of Health pages provide options to download SOH information from a Store toa csv file Options to delimit the data are grouped on the corresponding linked pages listed below See also Section 11 3 1 Extract State of Health data to a csv file on page 116 Change Data Type Choose a data type to download Change Time Choose a start date and time and a duration Show Available Times Shows time and gap information for each data band Change SOH Data Choose a different set of SOH data to download Predefined sets of some SOH data Table 11 1 on page 117 are provided in the drop down list on the SOH Data page This is the recommended method for SOH data types that are included in a predefined download as the predefined options include those SOH columns in context 1 86 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters For other SOH data you can download individual columns The default option User Selected shown in the drop down list is used only for selecting individual SOH col umns for download Use th
152. ection An overview of principles for connecting sensors and digitizers and recommended wiring lists for various sen sors Appendix D Filter Response Digitizer filter response Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information Open Source Freeware license information Appendix F Apollo Light Utility Procedures for using the Apollo Light utility to view and extract data from Stores on your file system Appendix G Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures Procedures for upgrading from Taurus software version 1 x to 2 x and from 2 x to 2 x and higher Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters A listing of each Ul page and brief descriptions of the parameters on each page including valid value ranges 1 3 Unpacking the shipment Note The information in this section should be used in conjunction with product warranty information Open the shipment and check the contents for completeness against the packing slip There is a configuration sheet containing specific configuration information for each Taurus Portable Seismograph included in the shipment This configuration sheet lists information such as the serial numbers of the parts shipped 4 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 1 Introduction Visually inspect the equipment for any damage that may have occurred in transit If there are any problems with the shipment please contact Nanometrics Support 1 4
153. ed If active medium unformatted format active medium switch media on startup Command sensor Download all data types Restart Shutdown 6 1 1 Logging in to the Taurus Use the Log In Log Off page to log in to one of the user accounts on the Taurus to access the Change Password page and to log out of the current session A logged in session is specific to the browser session That is the session will log off automatically when you close the browser for a browser session or when the display shuts down for a session on the Taurus display If you encounter an error page in the browser session you will still be logged in if you reopen the Taurus from a bookmark in the same browser session 6 1 1 1 Standard login 1 Choose Log In from the Taurus menu 2 Enter the UserID and Password UserID and Password are both case sensitive gt Ina browser type in the UserID and Password for the account you wish to use gt In the display choose the UserID from the drop down list and use the virtual keyboard to enter the Password see Section 3 7 Using the virtual keyboard on page 24 3 Click Log In If authentication is successful the Status page will open with the message Login Successful and the menu will now show items you are authorized to access If authentication is not successful the Status page message will be Login Failed You can go back to the Log In page and try again There is no limit on the number of login atte
154. ed inputs liiis 142 Input range and gain for a single ended signal liil 142 Sensor cable wiring lists 2 cece tee 142 Filter Response co sme d oo bs bn See Sth binds ti f 145 RESPONSE OVEMVIOW i ise cea eR ERR MR EU ape MMC UR RD dec ORC Ra 145 System fiter Values ies leu ireland 145 Analog low pass antialias filter lien 145 Transfer function s cese E Der chads EPI LBS EP YA Y 145 Digital IIR high pass filter l l nR III 146 Transfer TUCU Vda A E XA ERE PINXIT 146 GoelffiCIGntS i ren rex pe Seas E e Eep R e a eee QU eas Wah suia eu 146 Digital FIR low pass filters llle tB 147 Trafister TUrctlon sux e Mugen OR tee Bae lina a Dese bos 147 Goelfficlents rr feti T utere uiii eee Re 147 Open Source Free Software Information llle 149 Availability of open source free software components 200 e eee eee 149 Apache License csse A e ha hoes 149 Bouncy Castle License 0 0c eens 152 GNUSGP L uie ote teri oe eid Ass ita Se ed Dew aie s 152 md5 js License BSD License liliis 157 Modified BSD License oooococccoco e n 157 OpenBSD License 2 0 0 0 E EE E OE tees 158 Apollo Light Utility ts E RS US RI tae as ERU E 163 Installing Apollo Light 0 2 0 0 cee 163 Running Apollo Light isa esio nisiut ei eee aa RR IR hh 163 Initialize the Store loCati0N ooooccoocoocooo eh 164 Exit Apollo Light
155. ee Section 4 3 3 2 Bypass the Battery Low High volt age disconnect settings on startup on page 39 Figure 3 1 Taurus boot progress screen Taurus Starting please wait 96 Done 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 9 User Guide Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus 3 3 2 Start the Controller The Controller will start up following any of these actions When you connect power to the Taurus see also Section 3 3 1 on page 19 When you press the centre key for 1 second When you close the media door When the buffer fills in Buffered mode or when the buffer fills after a Shutdown in Communications mode if the media door is closed and the configured media type is installed The Controller will run continuously while the Taurus is in either of Interactive or Communications mode unless you shut down or restart the Controller In Buffered mode the Controller runs only long enough to write data to the Store when the buffer is full See also Section 3 1 About the Taurus operating modes on page 17 If the Store is reindexing while the Taurus is in Buffered mode you will see a yellow blinking SuperLED and the display may take a long time to start up after you press the centre key This should be a very rare scenario See Section 10 2 3 Reindex a Store on page 98 3 3 3 Shut down the Controller The Shutdown option powers down the Controller gracefully gt Always e
156. el They indicate the same thing The top panel LED is visi ble when you are using the keypad the side panel LED is useful for monitoring stacked Tauruses An EtherLED to indicate Ethernet connection status A MediaLED to indicate whether it is safe to remove or insert recording media 3 8 2 1 About LED blink patterns Immediately after you connect power to the Taurus the SuperLED will be on solid for about 5 seconds Depending on configuration and status during operation the LEDs will either be off or blinking with a status colour There are two blink rates slow 0 5s on 5s off and fast 0 5s on 0 5s off 3 8 2 2 Unit status LEDs SuperLEDs The SuperLEDs the LED on the top panel and the LED beside the power connector Figure 3 6 41ndicate overall unit status The top LED is not visible when Tauruses are stacked Figure 3 7 in that case view the LED on the connectors panel Table 3 2 describes the Taurus unit status indicated by the various SuperLED states The SuperLED colour is synchronized with the status bar colours on the Status page see also Table 3 1 on page 25 and Section H 2 Status on page 177 It uses infor mation from these 6 subsystems as inputs Timing status Media door status Store status Sensor status Power Manager status 9 9 99 9 Ethernet networking status 26 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus
157. em init string to an appropriate modem initialization command string for example AT amp F1 OK b Set the Extra modem init string to an additional modem command string for example ATSO 0 OK 11 Set Authentication to enabled v 12 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 7 3 6 2 Windows XP configuration for Taurus PPP dial in connection This procedure shows example settings based on a USRobotics 56K Faxmodem 1 Build a cable to connect Taurus to your modem Use the connector from the optional Taurus Connector Kit part number 15170 or equivalent See also Appendix B Connector Pinouts 2 Install the modem driver for USRobotics 56K Faxmodem for example find the driver mdmusr01 inf right click on the filename and choose Install 3 Create a cable connection modem a Go to Start gt Control Panel gt Phone and Modem Options b Click the Modems tab If U S Robotics 56K FAX EXT is not in the list i Click Add ii Choose Don t detect my modem Click Next 111 Choose 3Com Corporation in the Manufacturer list iv Choose U S Robotics 56K FAX EXT Click Next v Choose COM port Click Next vi In the Hardware Installation warning popup click Continue Anyway vii Click Finish to close the Add Hardware Wizard dialog c Click OK to close the Phone and Modem Opt
158. emperature outside the specified ranges for the installed media type SanDisk Extreme Com pactFlash cards can be used across the full operating environmental range of the Taurus See Section A 14 Environmental on page 127 for the operating range specifications 98 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 10 Recording Data 10 3 1 Taurus removable recording media options include a 1 8 ATA hard disk drive IDE hard drive and a CompactFlash card CF See Section A 6 Internal data storage on page 125 for specifications These are accessible via the media door Figure 10 5 on page 100 Insert and remove recording media Warning You may lose data or damage the media if you remove the IDE CF while the Controller is running Shut down the Controller and wait for the MediaLED to turn green before removing the IDE CF Figure 10 5 on page 100 The Taurus continues to collect and buffer data while the Controller is shut down The Controller starts up again when you close the media door If you want to preserve all of the buffered data complete the procedure and close the media door before the data buffer fills The time elapsed before the buffer fills will range from a few minutes to several hours depending on factors including the number of active channels sample rate seismic signal and noise and buffer size 2MB on units with serial number 0353 0375 0379 and higher 1 MB on all other units
159. en and either download using these settings or change the settings gt Click Download to save the log information to a text file using the current set tings gt To change the settings click the link to return to the appropriate settings page change the settings then click Next to proceed through the settings pages to the Download page For system log information settings pages and the corre sponding links include Change Data Type Choose a different data type to download Change Time Choose a different start date time and duration You can see available times under Show Available Times gt Use Clear All Choices if you want to deselect all of the current settings delimit ing the data and return to the Data Retrieval main page 11 3 3 Download the configuration audit trail to a cfg file You can download the system configuration audit trail from a Store to a file in text for mat The downloaded file is not a valid configuration for upload This procedure describes data extraction using the Data Retrieval page options 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 11 9 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 11 Accessing Data 1 Ona browser over an IP connection choose Data Retrieval from the menu 2 Choose System Configuration then click Next This opens a page with options to select the start date and time and duration of the log information to download 3 Set the time period parameters then click Next This opens a p
160. ensor Details page and then click Apply You can test the changes the configuration is applied automatically To save the changes click Commit If indicated by a UI message activate the new configura tion with a restart Shutdown Restart Figure 9 5 Upload a sensor configuration M Advanced Configuration Y Advanced Configuration General Communications Security Playback Timing Calibration Sensor Details Digitizer Power EsnmctempYTrilium240 cf Browse L A SE 9 2 2 2 Create a new sensor configuration from an existing file The predefined sensor configuration files are plain text in RDF format on the Taurus software CD as sensors cfg gt To make a new file copy an existing sensor configuration file and edit it with a text editor You may include up to four sensor configurations in one file If errors are introduced as a result of the editing on upload the configuration will be rejected in whole or in part 9 3 Configuring calibration Calibration configuration options are in the Advanced Configuration Calibration page Figure 9 6 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 91 User Guide Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Figure 9 6 Calibration page Advanced Configuration Y M Advanced Configuration P Advanced Configuration Calibration General Communications Calibration Type Sine y Securit Playback oca ee Channel 1 Vv Timing
161. ensor page optionS eaa a a Na aai ioa e Wi aTa hoa a a AARRE 189 H 10 Store Tools page options 0 0 ccc teens 190 H 11 Configuration page options 1 2 0 0 0 cee tee 190 H 12 Advanced Configuration page options ooooocooccocoooo 191 H 13 General page settings si seira aaniu noad a a E a E a R 192 H 14 Communications page options asse saaana 193 H 15 Ethernet page options liliis RR 193 H 16 Data Streaming page options ooocccccccco nes 194 H 17 Serial Port 1 page Opti0NMS oooocccoccocc nh 194 Tables H18 SLIP Page OPtiONS biota wet me P ure ELTIQIUCeqd inpet Pads 195 H 19 PPP page options o o ococcccocc eae 195 H 20 TDMA page options sssleseeee eee 196 H 21 Discovery page OPti0NS o ooooccoococ I 197 H 22 Security page options ooooococcocoo rn 197 H 23 Playback page options anaana ee III 197 H 24 Timing configuration page options lllleele BIA 198 H 25 Calibration page options o oooocccocoooc rh 198 H 26 Sensor Details page OPti0NMS ooooccoccooco seh 199 H 27 Sensor Control Lines page OPti0MS oooooccccococo eee 200 H 28 Mass Auto Centering page OPti0NS ooooccocccoco eere 201 H 29 Digitizer page options 0 III 202 H 30 Main page options osa a aeaa E N A I eae 203 H 31 Front End page Opti0NS o ooocccoccccn ne 203 H 32 Triggers page options ssp ues e Eaa 204 H 33 Inp
162. ensor signal Options are 10 20 40 50 80 100 120 200 250 500 500sps is not supported in Buffered mode Factory default is 100 Note that valid value ranges for some of the trigger parameters depend on the sample rate therefore some sample rates may be incompatible with your current trigger settings See also Section 8 1 3 Triggers settings on page 75 Table H 33 Input Filter page options on page 204 and Table H 34 Detector page options on page 205 Output Channels The number of output channels Options are 0 1 2 3 Factory default is 3 Enable DC Removal Set whether the DC removal filter is used on data Options are enabled W not enabled Factory default is not enabled DC Removal Cutoff Hz The corner frequency of the DC removal filter in hertz Float number between 0 001 and 1 0 Factory default is 0 001 Frames Per Packet The number of standard SEED frames per packet for transmission of time series data Options are 3 7 Factory default is 7 Sample Alignment Sample alignment after a time error correction Options are UTC None HRD Factory default is UTC Function buttons H 13 8 2 Front End See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons The Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Main page provides options to set the front end parameters for the Digitizer Table H 31 See also Section 8 1 2 Front En
163. equential damages of any char acter arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages 9 Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof You may choose to offer and charge a fee for acceptance of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsi bility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 51 User Guide Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX How to apply the Apache License to your work To apply the Apache License to your work attach the following boilerplate notice with the fields enclosed by brackets replaced with your own identifying information Don t include the brackets The text should be enclosed in the appropriate com
164. er on GPS is off Timing status was Green at least once Time Uncertainty gt 100us GPS is off GPS Either of these conditions Failed System Time has not been set yet after power on PLL state has not reached Coarse Lock GPS has been switched on for longer than the initialization time limit Timing Status was Green at least once Time Uncertainty gt 100us GPS is on Bad Either of these conditions Time System Time has not been set yet after power on GPS is on PLL state has reached Coarse Lock or better Time Error gt 100us Timing Status was Green at least once PLL state gt Coarse Lock Time Error gt 100us Yellow GPS Init System Time has not been set yet after power on GPS is on PLL state has not reached Coarse Lock GPS is on for shorter than the initialization time limit Green Time Either of these conditions OK PLL state has not reached Coarse Lock and Time Uncertainty lt 100us PLL state has reached Coarse Lock or better and Time Error 100us 1 78 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 1 Status page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Media door status bar The media door status bar indicates the status of the media door with a status colour and a text message Red with text Door Open Green with text Door Closed The media door should be closed while
165. er the Work where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s alone or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was sub mitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counter claim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work 1 50 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed 4 Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions a You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and b You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and c You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copy right patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and d If the Work inclu
166. errors Alert messages include the timestamp and a brief description Figure 3 10 You 30 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus can use these message timestamps as reference points for searching through system logs for occurrences that generated an Alert Use the links at the bottom of the page to navigate through the list of Alerts New est PrevPg previous page NextPg next page and Oldest In a browser you can jump to a specific Alert page using its URL for example http TaurusIPAd dress pages taurus alerts page pageToShowz12 would open Page 11 page num bering starts at page 0 the Newest page Figure 3 10 Alerts page example 2005 Nov 01 18 48 22 System start Interactive mode 18 39 00 Configuration Committed 18 38 53 Configuration Applied 16 06 36 Could not create new resource 15 03 50 System start Always On mode 15 02 24 Shutdown System Restart 15 02 06 Configuration Committed 15 02 01 Configuration Applied 14 46 16 System start Always On mode 13 57 39 Shutdown Forced Shutdown 2005 Oct 31 23 41 23 System start Always On mode 23 39 55 Shutdown System Restart 23 38 51 Configuration Committed 23 38 41 Configuration Applied 22 46 27 System start Interactive mode Newest PrevPq Page 5 NextPg Oldest 3 8 8 Data availability information The Data Availability pages provide an overview of availability
167. eshold but lower than the Red Threshold before initiating mass centring Float number from 0 1 to 72 Retries per Auto Center The maximum number of attempts to make to center the masses Integer from 0 to 20 Factory default is 0 Retry Interval min The number of minutes to wait between auto center retries Integer from 1 to 20 Factory default is 1 Function buttons H 13 8 Digitizer H 13 8 1 See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons The Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer page provides links to the relevant sub pages Table H 29 See also Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing Table H 29 Digitizer page options Widget Description Hyperlinks Links to sub pages Main Front End and Triggers See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of hyperlink behaviour on configuration pages Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons Main The Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Main page provides options to set the main parameters for the Digitizer Table H 30 See also Section 8 1 1 Main settings on page 71 Taurus Portable Seismograph 202 User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 30 Main page options Parameter Widget Description Sample Rate Hz The sample rate in hertz on the s
168. et will be sent to that gateway Ethernet The gateway used is the one obtained from the settings specified in the Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Ethernet page Serial Port 1 The gateway used is the Remote IP Address configured in the Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 1 pages 7 1 1 1 Set the packet routing default interface 1 Log in and go to the Advanced Configuration gt Communications page Figure 7 1 2 Choose the Default Interface option from the drop down list as appropriate to the type of network connection Ethernet or serial 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 53 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart Figure 7 1 Choose the packet routing default interface V SN 683 Advanced Configuration General Communications Security aa Timing Calibration ensor il Digitizer Power M reram Communications Default Interface Ethernet y Ethernet Data Streaming SerialPort1 Serial Port 2 Discovery co 7 2 Communications over Ethernet The Taurus provides standard modes for searching for an Ethernet LAN interface These include DHCP Link Local and Static IP There is also an option for no Ethernet gt Use the supplied Ethernet cable 15228
169. ether to enable this channel for calibration Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is enabled Attenuation Attenuate the calibration signal by the specified value Options are 1 10 100 1000 Factory default is 1 Amplitude Set the calibration signal amplitude in the appropriate Calibration Mode units volts or amperes as set in the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details page Float number Factory default is 0 1 This parameter will accept calibration signal amplitudes up to 5 0V or 60mA depending on the Calibration Mode VOLTAGE or CURRENT If taken as a single ended output for example between pin N SEN_CAL1 and pin V DGND the calibration circuit can provide a signal with a maximum amplitude of 4 5V Wait Time The length of time in seconds after the calibration coil has been enabled before sending the calibration signal Options are 0 15 30 60 120 300 600 1200 Factory default is 0 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 98 User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 25 Calibration page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Ramp Duration The length of time in seconds to bring the signal amplitude up to the configured amplitude and down from the configured amplitude Options are 0 10 30 60 120 600 1800 3600 Factory default is O Duration The length of time in seconds to generate the calibration signal
170. ff Function buttons to turn power to the sensor on and off Sensor power field An estimate of the sensor power consumption in watts accurate to about 15 for sensors drawing more than about 8mA Calibration Start Abort Function buttons to send a calibration command and to abort a calibration in progress Configuration options are in the Advanced Configuration gt Calibration page System Sensitivity System sensitivity in cnt m s or cnt m s s It is calculated using the sensor Sensitivity Value from the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details page and the Digitizer Input Range and Software Gain from the Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Front End page It is expressed in counts per unit of velocity or acceleration as appropriate using the selected Sensitivity Units on the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details page 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 89 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 9 Sensor page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Waveform images H 10 Store Tools The Store Tools page shows information about the active recording medium IDE drive or CF card and the availability of other media If you are logged in it also provides media and Store management options Table H 10 See also Chapter 10 Recording Data A waveform in near real time for each channel with scaling options and waveform sele
171. g from the factory default 2000 ms ARM Log Verbosity The level of detail of the ARM log Options are Info Verbose Debug Info is normal operation messages Debug is all messages Factory default is Info H 13 2 Communications The Advanced Configuration Communications page provides an option to set the Taurus default networking interface and links to related sub pages Table H 14 Table H 14 Communications page options Parameter Widget Description Default Interface Specify on which interface the routing gateway is located Ethernet or Serial Port 1 All packets not on an immediate subnet more than a single hop will be sent to a gateway determined by that interface The gateway is configured as an IP address of a machine The Taurus may have multiple gateways configured and the Default Interface specifies which gateway is in effect only one is allowed Ethernet The gateway used is the one obtained from the settings specified from the Ethernet settings page Serial Port 1 The gateway used is the Remote IP Address config ured in Serial Port 1 The serial port must be in either SLIP or PPP mode for this setting Hyperlinks Links to sub pages Ethernet Data Streaming Serial Port 1 Serial Port 2 and Discovery See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of hyperlink behaviour on configuration pages Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset
172. gram Whether that is true depends on what the Pro gram does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an 15148R5 2007 02 09
173. gs directory It contains operation messages generated by Apollo The main log can be configured to show only messages at or above a specified level of detail or verbosity The default is Info the minimum amount of detail Debug is the most detailed level To configure the log verbosity to a different level of detail choose an option from the drop down list in Configuration gt General gt Log verbosity then Apply and Commit the change 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 67 Appendix F Apollo Light Utility 1 68 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures Use the scripts upgrade procedure Section G 1 for firmware upgrades from Taurus Version 1 xx to Version 2 xx or higher Use the web upgrade procedure Section G 2 for firmware upgrades after a Version 2 xx or higher has been installed G 1 Upgrading Taurus from Version 1 xx to Version 2 xx or higher A The scripts procedure described in this section is applicable only to upgrades from Ver sion 1 xx to Version 2 xx or higher and will not be supported for future releases For future releases use the Web upgrade procedure described in Section G 2 on page 172 Warning Taurus Version 1 xx uses a data Store that is incompatible with Ver sion 2 xx and higher Ensure that you download or back up your Ver sion 1 xx data before installing the 2 xx or higher upgrade as the upgrade wi
174. gure 11 4 you can edit the default Playback settings for all data extract sessions 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart Figure 11 4 Playback configuration page V Playback Network Name EST Station Name fauo Channel 1 Name BHZ Channel 2 Name BN Channel 3 Name BHE 11 1 3 3 Initial setup for extracting to Seisan format The first time you extract data using the Seisan format option on the Data Retrieval download page you must install the storeDataToSeisan conversion program on your PC 1 Ensure that you have Seisan installed on your PC with these settings e The environment variable SEISAN TOP must be set e For each station you will be decoding you must add to the DAT SEISAN DEF file two lines a WAVEFORM BASE and CONT BASE For example for STNO1 WAVEFORM BASE Waveform base name STNO1 CONT_BASE REA continuous base STNO1 2 On the Data Retrieval download page for Seisan format click the Download it link and then save the file storeDataToSeisan zip to your PC It includes installation and usage instructions in the file install_storeDataToSeisan txt Unzip the files to c nmx bin or nmx bin depending on platform 4 The first time you download a Seisan file in the browser download window choose Open and choose
175. guring Taurus User Access Table H 22 Security page options Parameter Widget Description Local Authentication Determines the type of authentication that can be used for logging in via the display Options are Standard Quick Login Factory default is Standard See also Section 6 1 1 2 Quick login on page 49 Login Account Indicates which account will be used for Quick Login Options are user tech central Factory default is user Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 4 Playback The Advanced Configuration gt Playback page provides options to identifying informa tion about this Taurus to be used in downloaded data files Table H 23 See also Sec tion 11 1 3 2 Confirm Playback settings on page 107 Table H 23 Playback page options Parameter Widget Description Network Name The network name or code Alphanumeric value Station Name The station name for this Taurus Alphanumeric value for example TAUO 105 for Taurus serial number 0105 Channel n Name The channel name for each of the time series data channels Alphanumeric value for example BHZ BHN BHE Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 97 Appendix H Ul Pages and P
176. he Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGE MENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE E 4 GNU GPL The GNU General Public License GPL Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program 1 52 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs
177. he Taurus to finish booting Progress is indicated by the LED colour and blink patterns see Section 3 8 2 Status LEDs on page 26 and the boot progress screen see Section 3 3 1 Start the Taurus on page 19 c About 2 minutes after connecting the power you can start the Taurus display Press and hold the centre key on the keypad for about 1 second to turn on the display see Figure 3 2 Taurus keypad functions on page 22 It will take about 10 to 15 seconds for the display to start It will open to the Status page 5 View the Status page to check basic operation a Verify that the status bars are all green Figure 2 3 For an initial startup in a new location it may take the GPS receiver a few minutes to lock Until then the GPS timing status bar will be red or yellow The Sensor status bar may be red depending on the Sensor settings See Table H 1 Status page options on page 177 for information on interpret ing the status bars b Verify that waveform images are displayed and that the value for Packets is incrementing this indicates that data are being recorded to the Store 6 Note the Taurus current Ethernet IP address Use this address to connect to the Taurus for example if you will use a web browser for configuration http Tau rusIPAddress See Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications for infor mation on how the IP address is obtained Figure 2 3 Taurus Status page SH 105 Mode
178. he active Store the Tau rus will continue to record to that medium automatically Two possibilities exist Ifthe medium does not yet contain a Store the Taurus will create a new Store using the last configured Store size setting Ifthe medium already has a Store created by a Taurus the Taurus will automati cally start appending data to the existing Store see also Section 10 2 1 1 About appended Stores on page 96 If you do not want to have the new data appended to an existing Store for example if it was created on a different Taurus you can either reformat the medium or delete the existing Store You can then create a new Store 2 5 Format recording media You can use the Taurus to format recording media to the Linux Ext3 file system For a description of formatting options and procedures see Section 10 3 2 Format recording media on page 101 2 6 Retrieve data from a Taurus Time series data state of health SOH data log information and system configuration information are recorded in the Nanometrics Store There are various methods for accessing these data listed below Refer to the sections indicated for more information gt Retrieve data from the Store to files on your network using options in an external web browser over an IP connection Time series data may be extracted in any of MiniSEED Seisan version 8 0 or higher or ASCII formats Section 11 2 on page 109 Other information such as
179. he calibration go to the Sensor page and click Start 2 7 4 Environmental seals Taurus can be sealed against dust and moisture Before leaving a Taurus installation confirm the following The media door is closed with the door knob locked and the black plastic lever in the down position 1 4 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 2 Quick Start All Taurus connectors are either occupied by the appropriate cable connector or are sealed with the optional factory installed dust caps Nanometrics part number 15762 or equivalent The self sealing pressure relief screw is torqued to hand tight Figure 2 4 This screw is a slot head on older models and is a 2 5mm hex Allen key on newer mod els Figure 2 4 Pressure relief screw location Pressure relief screw 2 7 5 Installation This example provides an overview of installing a Taurus See the appropriate sections of the manual for more information 1 Choose a deployment option appropriate for your project for example Install Taurus as a stand alone data recorder you would likely use Buffered mode for this Install Taurus in a network for example to stream data to a central acquisition server such as a Nanometrics NAQS Server or if continuous IP access is required requires the Taurus to be in Communications mode 2 In the lab configure the Taurus as appropriate see also Section 2 3 View or change configuration setti
180. he external NMXbus connector External NMXbus is not yet supported Read only Sensor Current An estimate of the current drawn by the connected sensor for sensors that draw more than about 8 mA It is accurate to about 15 Read only Controller Current An estimate of the current drawn by the Taurus controller board It is accurate to about 15 Read only Digitizer Current An estimate of the current drawn by the Taurus Digitizer board It is accurate to about 15 Read only External 1 2 3 4 Voltage on the specified External SOH connector Read only Time Last update time of the SOH information Controller Time see Table 8 1 Taurus time definitions on page 79 Read only H 5 Alerts The Alerts pages show a list of occurrences such as startups shutdowns and major errors Alert messages include the timestamp and a brief description You can use these message timestamps as reference points for searching through log files for events that generated an Alert See also Section 3 8 7 Alert messages on page 30 H 6 Data Availability The Data Availability pages show graphical and text summaries of data availability There is a graphical summary of the time series data availability under the appropriate tab for a selected month week or day Under the Text tab are text summaries with links 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 81 User Guide Appendix H Ul Pages and Paramete
181. he protocol description in the RFC file it must be called by a name other than ssh or Secure Shell Tatu continues However I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or 1 58 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information copyrights held by third parties and the software includes parts that are not under my direct control As far as I know all included source code is used in accordance with the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose the GNU license being the most restrictive see below for details However none of that term is relevant at this point in time All of these restrictively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed from OpenSSH i e RSA is no longer included found in the OpenSSL library IDEA is no longer included its use is deprecated DES is now external in the OpenSSL library GMP is no longer used and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL Zlib is now external in a library The make ssh known hosts script is no longer included TSS has been removed MDS is now external in the OpenSSL library RC4 support has been replaced with ARCA support from OpenSSL Blowfish is now external in the OpenSSL library The licence continues Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software are publicly avail able on the Inter
182. hysical installation for example the power system proper equipment grounding and location of the GPS antenna Configure Taurus for your application The as shipped configuration of a Taurus includes various default settings but setup of the Taurus will include changing some of these settings as appropriate see Section 2 3 on page 9 for an overview and relevant chapters in Part 2 for detailed information Typically you would do most of the configuration before field deployment using a web browser on a PC over a network connection You can also use the Taurus dis play and keypad to change the configuration in the field 3 Install the hardware at the site power supply sensor GPS antenna Taurus 2 7 2 Powering and grounding considerations gt See Section A 13 Power on page 127 for power specifications and Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus for information on powering the Taurus gt See Section 4 2 Grounding a Taurus installation on page 35 and Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconnection for guidelines on equipment and signal grounding It is recommended that you use Shutdown to power down the Controller before disconnecting the power from the Taurus If you disconnect the power while the Controller is running you may lose data presently cached in the buffer This can be about 15 seconds of data if the Taurus is running in Communications mode and up to several hours of data if the Taurus is running
183. ications cable between two computers is not in the list i Click Add 11 Choose Don t detect my modem Click Next iii Choose Communications cable between two computers Click Next iv Choose COM Port Click Next v Click Finish to close the Add Hardware Wizard dialog c Choose Communications cable between two computers and then click Prop erties d Click the Modem tab gt Set Maximum Port Speed to 57600 e Click the Advanced tab f Click Change Default Preferences and use these settings i Set Port speed to 57600 ii Set Flow control to None iii Click OK g Click OK to close the Communications cable between two computers Proper ties dialog h Click OK to close the Phone and Modem Options dialog 2 Create a PPP connection a Go to Start Control Panel Network Connections b Click Create a new connection c In the New Connection Wizard click Next d Choose Set up an advanced connection Click Next e Choose Connect directly to another computer Click Next f Choose Guest Click Next g Type a name in the Computer Name box for example Taurus PPP Click Next h Choose Communications cable between two computers COMx Click Next 1 Select Anyone s use Click Next 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 67 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 3 Click Finish A Connect ComputerName dialog box will
184. ice or a device connected to the External SOH Temp The temperature inside the Taurus in degrees Celsius Packets The number of data packets recorded to the Store since the Controller was Started Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 77 User Guide Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 1 Status page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Timing status bar The timing status bar indicates the status of the system time and its inputs with a status colour and a text message and provides a link to the Timing page Timing configuration options are on the Advanced Configuration gt Timing page See Table 8 1 Taurus time definitions on page 79 for definitions of Taurus derived times Note that System time starts from zero on power on and has not been set properly until Time status has been Green at least once since power on PLL state lt Coarse Lock either Free Running or No Lock Colour Text Indicates Red No Antenna open is detected This is a hardware Antenna fault condition even if Taurus time is OK The Lassen iQ GPS receiver can detect an antenna open condition but the Lassen SQ GPS receiver cannot If your Taurus uses the SQ this status report option is not available Antenna Antenna short is detected This is a hardware Short fault condition even if Taurus time is OK GPS Off Either of these conditions System Time has not been set yet after pow
185. igher than the Taurus low input impedance If the required load resistor is lower than the Taurus input imped ance you can use the Taurus in low impedance mode by choosing a shunt resistor that in parallel with the Taurus input impedance achieves the desired load shunt value Alternatively you can put the Taurus in high impedance mode to use the load shunt resistor value specified by the passive sensor directly Note that in low impedance mode the Taurus input impedance forms a voltage divider with the output impedance of the source signal so that for example a 436Q source would result in a 1 decrease in signal amplitude at the digitizer The exact signal amplitude is Taurus Input R R R Sensor Output where R is the Taurus input impedance and R is the total source impedance both sides of the differential source output plus both conductors of the sensor to digi tizer cable The voltage divider effect is negligible when using high impedance mode where atten uation is less than 0 1 for source impedance up to 9kQ When using High Impedance mode you can choose between two common mode signal ranges Low Power The common mode rejection range is 0 78 V and the clip level for ground referenced single ended signals is 1 56 V Do not select the Low Power option with an Input Range of 40V jp High Power The High Power mode increases the common mode rejection capa bility to 1 8 V and raises the clip level fo
186. ights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of condi tions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 1 60 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix E Open Source Free Software Information THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPE CIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIM ITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
187. iguration changes isses 10 Basic configuration settings liene 10 Running Mode Sss d aci peer ROREM SR REIS MER Poe ate ged 10 Number of channels o oooooooo or 11 Digitizer sample rate ces nectar eee RR A MUERE MR died Rx eee 11 Playback Settings sme ee ed a re ee IUDA Ned DEAE 11 Install recording media IDE hard drive or CF card 1 0 0 0 0 000 eee 11 Format recording media 0 2 2 0 cece nr 12 Retrieve data from a Taurus 0 nuan e Ei ee eee eee eee eens 12 Install Taurus tc pat ds a PRE GER A ia 12 Deployment Opti0NS oooococcccoo eee 3 A 13 Powering and grounding considerations 20 0c e eee eee eee 13 Sensor configuration considerations ooooocoooorrroo eese 14 Mass auto centre and masslocks liliis 14 Calibrations sao er we Deb wth Sed EAS ED RC Ul ec TANE Xx o MR d wate me id 14 Environmental sealS ce eee eee ee eee ees 14 InistallatlOD i sence a E che AAA E a he leet gt ara ov ae Ee iu 15 Operating and Maintaining Taurus 0 000 ees 17 About the Taurus operating modes 00 00 cece eee 17 Configure the running mode Buffered or Communications 17 Interactive Mode vues RR GOS A wad La a EA CARRIERS 17 BURErEG mode rica ia even bass thee we See teca Rae eee 18 Gommi nications mode test bes ER aaa aed a et ad ARE 18 About th Controllers tania ox Rn a Rae rev ud
188. impedance High Z D 2 1 1 Transfer function 1 PA A EQ 1 GO R C jot l Ie where C 10x I0 F and R p Q for low impedance mode EN EHE fae TER 33600 9600 Z and R 9600 ZQ for high impedance mode 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 45 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix D Filter Response where Z is the sensor s output impedance The corner frequency f is therefore 1 Jo RC Hz EQ 2 If the sensor output impedance is negligible fo 2132Hz in low impedance mode fo 1659Hz in high impedance mode D 2 2 Digital IIR high pass filter The digital IIR high pass filter is used for the optional DC removal feature DC removal if used is applied after the digital FIR filtering D 2 2 1 Transfer function y n K x n x n 1 F y n 1 EQ 3 where y n is the current output sample Kis the filter gain x n is the current input sample x n 1 is the previous input sample Fj is the filter coefficient y n 1 is the previous output sample D 2 2 2 Coefficients The IIR filter is implemented as a first order IIR filter using the following coefficients calculated at runtime a Fy EQ 4 1 m n EEE E EQ 5 nf Ee where Fs is the output sample rate fis the 3dB corner frequency of the filter 1 46 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix D Filter Response The time constant TC of the filter can be calculated as fo
189. including information about gaps See Section H 6 Data Availability on page 181 for an overview of what information is shown and Chapter 11 for the data download procedures 3 8 9 System configuration information The Taurus maintains an audit trail of configuration changes made since the Store was created See also Section 5 3 Configuration audit trail on page 44 gt You can download the audit trail to a text file to view as a reference See Section 11 3 3 on page 119 Version information of Taurus hardware and software components is shown in the Sys tem Info page gt You can download the version information to a text file See Section 11 3 4 on page 120 3 9 Maintaining the Taurus The Taurus hardware does not require scheduled maintenance Use the current status information and the system logs to assist with troubleshooting 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 31 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus If after troubleshooting it is determined that the Taurus requires repair or if you have any questions contact Nanometrics support see Section 1 4 Technical sup port on page 5 gt Before returning a unit to Nanometrics for repair contact Nanometrics Support to obtain an RMA number New firmware uploads may be available periodically See also Appendix G Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures 32 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09
190. ing the upload no changes are made gt The configuration is applied automatically on upload See Section 5 4 2 if you want to revert to the previous configuration 2 If you want to make the uploaded configuration permanent click Commit 3 Ifthe uploaded configuration contains changes to parameters that normally require a restart to become active then restart the Taurus Shutdown Restart This would always be the case for a complete configuration 5 6 Saving default configurations You can save whole or partial default configurations that you can later upload to any Taurus Partial default configurations are useful if you do not want to overwrite other parameters on upload For example Download and save the entire factory default configuration from a new Taurus Download and save an entire changed configuration as a customized default Copy a predefined seismometer configuration file edit and save the file for a dif ferent seismometer configuration see also Section 9 2 2 Using predefined sensor configurations on page 90 46 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Configuring Taurus User Access This chapter provides an overview and procedures for user access via the Taurus UI and basic information for using other protocols such as SSH 6 1 User access via the Taurus UI To prevent unauthorized users from changing a Taurus configuration there is a user authentication system user n
191. inking yellow and some UI pages will not be available until reindexing is complete Reindexing may take a long time depending on how much data are in the Store Blinking red There is a fault or condition that prevents the unit from operating properly For example GPS Timing status is not good missing recording media a hardware or software problem no Ethernet connection if in Interactive mode or Communications mode Investigate the problem using the Ul to check status if necessary and if possible Figure 3 6 SuperLED locations 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 27 User Guide Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus Figure 3 7 Stack of Tauruses 3 8 2 3 Ethernet status LED EtherLED The EtherLED on the back panel Figure 3 8 indicates the status of the Taurus Ether net connection Table 3 3 describes the status indicated by the various LED states Table 3 3 EtherLED states LED state Ethernet status Off The Taurus has no power The Controller is shut down Buffered mode or Communications mode after you choose Shutdown on the Shutdown page Yellow solid 8s The Taurus is starting to boot immediately after power is connected or the Controller is starting Fast blinking green Networking is enabled and a link is established Slow blinking green Networking is not enabled Blinking yellow Initial power up diagnostics Blinking red Networking is co
192. installed The scripts procedure described in Section G 1 is applicable only to upgrades from Version 1 xx to Version 2 xx or higher and will not be supported for future releases Do not boot the Taurus in factory test mode for Web upgrades boot it in normal mode Factory test mode is required only for the scripts upgrade procedure described in Section G 1 gt Ensure that the Taurus is configured to Communications Mode before upgrading with the Web upgrade procedure Section 3 1 About the Taurus operating modes on page 17 gt Uploading the file over your LAN using the Web upgrade may time out if you are using a proxy server If this happens you can change network settings to bypass the proxy server for local addresses For example In Firefox go to Tools gt Options General gt Connection Settings gt No Proxy for use the address and mask width for a range of addresses for example w x y 0 24 gt In Netscape go to Edit gt Preferences gt Advanced gt Proxies gt No Proxy for use the address and mask width for a range of addresses for example w x y 0 24 gt In Internet Explorer go to Tools gt Internet Options gt Connections gt LAN Set tings enable Bypass proxy server for local addresses gt Advanced gt Excep tions use the address and an asterisk wildcard for a range of addresses for example w x y G2 1 Using the Taurus Upgrade page This procedure requires that the Taurus be con
193. ion 10 3 2 1 on page 101 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 95 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 10 Recording Data The Taurus will prompt you to create a new Store under either of these conditions e After deleting the currently active Store Section 10 2 2 on page 97 On switching to the medium in the other media slot after formatting that medium Section 10 3 3 on page 104 If you insert a used medium that is already formatted to Ext3 but does not contain a Store the Taurus will need at least 200MB of free space on the medium to create a Store If the Taurus is creating a Store automatically it will use the last Store capacity setting from the Taurus configuration when creating the new Store It will set the Store capacity to the available space on the medium if the last Store configuration was set to Full for example Figure 10 2 on page 98 If the last Store configuration was for a spe cific capacity for example 800 MB the Taurus will create a Store of that capacity if there is sufficient space on the medium If the last configured Store size was 1 GB 1000 MB on CF and the current medium is a 1GB CF there still will not be sufficient space after deleting all files or formatting the medium as the Taurus will require some of the space for other operations If there is insufficient space on the medium the Status page will indicate Small Media and a Store Tools page message will provide some details for example Figu
194. ion from the Taurus You cannot delete an item if it is the only item in the list 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 20 1 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 28 Mass Auto Centering page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Red Threshold V The minimum voltage level to indicate that the mass position is out of range One minute after this level is crossed for any sensing element mass centring is initiated Threshold range is from negative to positive for example 1 indicates 1 to 1 Float number 0 001 or higher and greater than Yellow Threshold if used Factory default is 1 000000 Auto Center on Red Initiate mass centring if the Red Threshold is crossed Options are enabled W not enabled Factory default is not enabled Yellow Threshold V The minimum voltage level to indicate that the mass position is marginal After Yellow Holdoff Time has expired mass centring is initiated Threshold range is from negative to positive for example 1 indicates 1 to 1 Float number 0 001 or higher and lower than Red Threshold if used Factory default is 1 000000 Auto Center on Yellow Initiate mass centring if the Yellow Holdoff Time has expired Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is not enabled Yellow Holdoff Time h The number of hours to wait while any mass position voltage is higher than the Yellow Thr
195. ions such as Ethernet Off can only be viewed on the display Red status with text Ethernet Ethernet networking is enabled but there is no link Green status with text Ethernet Ethernet networking is enabled and a link is established Green status with text Ethernet Off Ethernet networking is not ena bled Ethernet configuration options are in the Advanced Configuration gt Communications page and the Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Ethernet page Waveform images One waveform image for each channel shows the time series data in near real time H 3 Waveform The Waveform page shows a waveform in near real time for each channel with DC offset correction There are options to view a single channel at a time or all three chan nels pause the waveform display and adjust the scale Table H 2 Table H 2 Waveform page options Parameter Widget Description Time scale Choose the time scale width in seconds Options 5 10 15 30 60 120 Factory default is 30 Vertical scale Choose the amplitude scale in counts The setting presently in use is shown on the upper right of the waveform After about 1 minute from startup of the Controller the waveform will show AC RMS and DC average On a single waveform display the minimum and maximum values of the visible data are also shown as a numeric value Options Auto for automatic scaling of each channel independently 20
196. ions dialog 4 Create a PPP connection a Go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections b Click Create a new connection c In the New Connection Wizard click Next d Choose Connect to the Internet Click Next e Choose Set up my connection manually Click Next f Choose Connect using a dial up modem Click Next g Type a name in the Computer Name box for example Taurus PPP Dialup Click Next h Type in the phone extension Click Next 1 Choose Anyone s use Click Next 3 In the Internet Account Information page enter these settings 64 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 1 Type pppuser in the User name box ii Type beaver16 in the Password box iii Type beaver16 in the Password box iv Set Use this account name and password when to enabled v Set Make this the default Internet connection to not enabled vi Set Turn on Internet connection Firewall to not enabled vii Click Next k Click Finish A Connect ComputerName dialog box will pop up 1 Click Dial If it succeeds a connection icon will appear in the Windows notifi cation area with the message ComputerName is now connected m Test the connection by pinging the Local IP address configured on the Taurus from a command prompt 7 3 6 3 Viewing modem logs on Windows XP Nw Bor PF Go to Start gt Control Panel
197. ire a full loop back serial cable to maintain a connection b Close all serial port applications such as Hyper terminal Teraterm c Ensure all modems are removed from the Modems tab Control Panel Phone and Modem Options before continuing Other modem drivers may confuse XP enough to refuse connection Log in and go to the Advanced Configuration Communications page Figure 7 5 on page 63 Ensure the Default Interface is set to Serial Port 1 Section 7 1 1 1 on page 53 Click the Serial Port 1 hyperlink Choose PPP from the Mode drop down list Click the PPP hyperlink Choose a link speed from the Speed drop down list Set the Local IP to the IP address of the local PPP interface Set Remote IP to the IP address of the remote PPP interface 10 Choose direct from the Connection Type drop down list 66 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 11 Leave the Modem init string empty 12 Leave the Extra modem init string empty 13 Set Authentication to enabled v 14 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 7 3 7 2 Windows XP configuration for Taurus PPP direct connection 1 Create cable connection modem a Go to Start Control Panel Phone and Modem Options b Click the Modems tab If Commun
198. is License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distrib uted through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the b
199. is not powered gt Do not remove the IDE CF if the MediaLED is red Figure 10 5 Replacing the recording media Ensure that the MediaLED is green or off indicating that it is safe to remove or insert media 4 Gently pull on the end of the IDE CF to remove it 5 Gently insert the replacement IDE CF Note The media door is keyed such that it can be closed only if it is positioned correctly Ensure the door is inserted right side up before you try to close it 6 Close the media door before the data buffer fills Push the media door in place and twist the door knob clockwise to the locked position horizontal Rotate the black plastic lever down so that it lies flat against the door Closing the media door will start the Controller If you want to start the display press the centre key for about 1 second The dis play will start up once the Controller has finished booting The Store options for the replacement medium generally include the following Ifthe active medium contains a Store the Taurus will append data to that Store automatically If the Store was created on a different Taurus is recommended that you delete the existing Store and create a new one Section 10 2 2 on page 97 Ifthe medium is not formatted to Ext3 you can format it and create a new Store Section 10 3 2 Ifthe active medium is formatted to Ext3 but does not yet contain a Store the Tau rus will create one automatically using the la
200. is out of range Mass centring is initiated one minute after this level is crossed for any channel Threshold range is configured value Minimum value is 0 001 and must be greater than Yellow Threshold if used Factory default is 1 000000 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 87 User Guide Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors e Auto Center on Red Initiate mass centring if the Red Threshold is crossed Options are enabled not enabled Factory default is not enabled e Yellow Threshold V The minimum mass position voltage level to indicate that the mass position is marginal After the Yellow Holdoff Time has expired mass centring is initiated Threshold range is configured value Minimum value is 0 001 and must be lower than Red Threshold if used Factory default is 1 000000 e Auto Center on Yellow Initiate mass centring when the Yellow Holdoff Time has expired Options are enabled v not enabled Factory default is not ena bled e Yellow Holdoff Time h The number of hours to wait before initiating mass centring while any mass position voltage is higher than the Yellow Threshold but lower than the Red Threshold Value range is from 0 1 to 72 Retries per Auto Center The maximum number of attempts to make to center the masses Integer from 0 to 20 Factory default is 0 Retry Interval min The number of minutes to wait between auto center retries Integer from 1
201. ium whether or not it is already one active one formatted You cannot format the active medium if it is already inactive formatted Therefore to format the currently active medium first Switch Media to the other medium Section 10 3 3 on page 104 Unformatted media If you click Format MediaType for an inserted medium the Taurus will detect and then format it If there are media inserted in both slots the Taurus will format the MediaType you selected and leave the other medium unformatted Format unformatted media For unformatted media the Taurus will indicate that media are either not available or are not formatted and will provide different options depending on media status Figure 10 6 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 01 User Guide Chapter 10 Recording Data Figure 10 6 Unformatted media options B M Store Tools SH 105 7 Mud Store Tools Y SN 22 5 Directory cf store does not exist Directory ide store does not exist Active Media Active Media NONE Current Configuration Current Configuration IDE IDE Available No or not formatted IDE Available No or not formattec CF Available No or not formatted CF Available Yes VY Store Tools Y SH 22 e Login Successful Active Media Active Store Size Store Space Used 5 Compact Flash Available No or r mot formatted Format Compact Flash Delete Store 1 Sh
202. keyboard Taurus provides a virtual keyboard that you can use to enter text in the display using the Taurus keypad Figure 3 5 1 Click the Keys link beside the text field into which you want to enter a value 2 Navigate the virtual keyboard using the Taurus keypad left right top bottom keys and use the centre key to choose the currently selected virtual key Alphanumeric selections will be entered in the field at the top of the screen 24 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus 3 Once you have finished entering the value click the Done button to exit the keys page This enters the value in the original page Figure 3 5 Virtual keyboard for text field entries on the display A 199 71 138 3 8 Monitoring Taurus operation Taurus includes these methods for monitoring operation The LEDs provide a quick view of current Taurus status Section 3 8 2 on page 26 The Status page includes status bars to assist with interpreting the LEDs Section 3 8 3 on page 29 Various pages show the current state of subsystems such as SOH Sensor and Timing pages Section 3 8 4 on page 29 SOH data are recorded for the external SOH channels and for internal SOH Sec tion 3 8 5 on page 30 The system logs provide detailed operation history Section 3 8 6 on page 30 Alert messages can be used to narrow down a search through system logs Section 3 8 7 on page 30
203. kground indicates an error condition Some of the status bars also have links to additional pages such as Timing Sensor Store Tools which show additional configuration or status information that may help with identifying any problems 3 8 4 Pages showing current status information Various pages show current status information See these sections in Appendix H UI Pages and Parameters on page 175 for an overview of the information shown on each page Section H 2 Status on page 177 Section H 4 SOH on page 181 Section H 8 Timing on page 187 Section H 9 Sensor on page 189 The SOH information shown on these pages is updated every 5s independent of the SOH sample rate setting see also Section 3 8 5 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 29 User Guide Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus 3 8 5 SOH data SOH data are recorded to the Store for the 4 External SOH channels and for internal SOH gt You can download SOH data to csv files See Section 11 3 1 on page 116 for information on downloading SOH information 3 8 5 1 Set the SOH sample rate You can set the SOH sample rate This setting applies to the 4 External SOH channels and some of the internal SOH The internal SOH using this setting include the types listed in Table 11 1 on page 117 except for the types in the row labelled PowerPC which are not configurable 1 2 Log in and go to the Advance
204. lar considerations apply except that the calculation for net voltage drop in the Taurus is 0 5 peak current draw of the peripheral 100 mV 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 37 User Guide Chapter 4 Powering the Taurus e NMXbus Similar considerations apply except that the calculation for net voltage drop in the Taurus is 0 5 peak current draw of the peripheral 100mV External SOH When there is a negative input voltage across External SOH val ues pins A G for example if ground is connected to negative on the voltage sup ply then an incorrect value appears for SOH Ensure ground is floating from negative to prevent this error GPS antenna Do not short the GPS connector to the Taurus chassis as this may introduce a ground loop for example if the optional metal dust caps are installed keep any loose caps away from the GPS connector The GPS antenna is on digital ground which has a single point connection to ana log ground and analog ground is connected to chassis ground The GPS TNC con nector is fully isolated from the chassis and therefore is isolated from chassis ground The purpose of this scheme is to avoid a ground loop from digital ground to chassis to analog ground Accidental momentary connection to the chassis is not a problem but a permanent connection may create ground loops Ideally the GPS antenna is isolated from ground and in most cases this is fine since the antenna
205. lick Reset applicable only if you have not yet clicked Change Password 6 To accept the new password click Change Password You will be logged in to that account automatically If you change and then forget your passwords you can revert to the default set of pass words listed in Table 6 1 1 Access the Taurus via telnet or SSH and log in as root user root factory default password dolphin18 2 Delete the file home taurus_x users txt 3 Inthe UI go to the Shutdown page and click Restart 6 2 Other access protocols FTP telnet and SSH You can access the Taurus file system via File Transfer Protocol FTP telnet and Secure Shell SSH Taurus supports SSH 1 and SSH 2 SSH is included as of Taurus firmware version 2 x This section provides basic information for accessing the Taurus using these protocols Nanometrics does not provide technical support for use of these protocols Procedure details will depend on the operating system and client you are using and your network setup FTP and telnet are both cleartext protocols so it is risky to use them across an unsecure network Where security is an issue it is better to use SSH which encrypts the entire session Most UNIX Linux systems include an SSH client On Windows you can install a client such as PuTTY http www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty PuTTY includes other utilities such as PSFTP a secure FTP utility The Taurus server uses the standard port n
206. ll delete the old Store This procedure requires that the Taurus be connected to a local network LAN using the supplied Ethernet cable 15228 or equivalent You will require a Windows or Linux PC to establish a telnet session with the Taurus to upload the new firmware and install it 1 Obtain the Taurus firmware upgrade package a taurus release releaseNumber tgz file and place it in a convenient folder on the Windows or Linux PC you will use to connect to the Taurus 2 Power up the Taurus in factory test mode a Shut down the Taurus Go to the Shutdown page and click Shutdown b Once the LED below the Ethernet connector is off disconnect the power cable c Press and hold the centre key down while you connect the power cable and wait for the LED on the top of the Taurus to start blinking then release the centre key 3 Check the IP address of your Taurus if you are not sure what it is Once the Ether net LED is blinking green press the centre key for about 1 second to start the dis 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 69 Appendix G Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures play Wait for the display to come up if the display has not started after several minutes press the centre key again for about 1 second and wait The IP address of the Taurus is shown on the Current Status page 4 Telnet to the Taurus Use root for both the login and the password Note The installation files will requir
207. llows 1 2n f TC Q 6 D 2 3 Digital FIR low pass filters The 3 to 4 stage digital FIR filter low pass filters and decimates the data to the output sample rate D 2 3 1 Transfer function N 1 y n Y c x n i EQ 7 i 0 where y n is the output sample x n i is an input sample c i is a FIR coefficient N is the number of coefficients D 2 3 2 Coefficients Table D 1 on page 148 shows the individual digital filter stages and associated decima tion for each output sample rate and the cumulative filter delay You may obtain the filter coefficient sets from the file Taurus_FIR_filter_coefficients txt included with the Taurus software You may also obtain these values by running the utility Tresponse see the Data Playback manual Nanometrics document number 14548 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 47 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix D Filter Response Table D 1 Digital filter stages and associated decimation for each output sample rate 1 48 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide Output Stage Cumulative Sample Filter Parameter Filter Delay Rate 1 2 3 4 seconds of Coefficients 213 177 113 223 10 6 172200 Decimation 20 15 5 2 of Coefficients 165 187 113 223 20 3 104233 Decimation 15 10 5 2 of Coefficients 177 71 113 223 40 1 547933 Decimation 15 5 5 2 of Coefficients 20
208. load it to the Taurus File upload Browse for or enter the file path and name of the file to upload then click Upload to upload the file 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 85 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 4 Time Series by Event file upload options Continued Parameter Widget Description Event list The list of all events from the uploaded file You may choose an event to search for in the Store click the radio button Event form Click the radio button to select the event once you have filled in the event form fields Text fields are provided for you to enter an event manually Label The event name as an ASCII string of any length Time An ASCII string of the format yyyy MM dd HH mm ss Location Depth km lat Latitude 90 to 90 degrees lon Longitude 180 to 180 degrees depth Depth in kilometres integer from 0 to 2 1 Table H 5 Time Series by Event time selection by phase options Parameter Widget Description Pre Event Time Number of seconds of data to download preceding the calculated start time Start Phase Available phases that you may choose to set a start time automatically Phase options are loaded according to what would be available for an event at that location relative to the Taurus location at the time the data were recorded Post Event Time Number of seconds of data to download following th
209. lter in the trigger input filter Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Triggers gt Input Filter page gt Note that valid value ranges for some of the parameters depend on the sample rate see Table H 33 Input Filter page options on page 204 and Table H 34 Detector page options on page 205 gt Ensure that the Trigger On Ratio and channel gain are configured to values that are not so high that they will prevent events from ever triggering Trigger On Ratio is in the Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Triggers gt Detector n page and chan nel gain is determined by the settings Input Range and Software Gain in the Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Front End page gt If you wish to simulate an amplitude threshold trigger you can use a short STA time constant and a long LTA time constant To enable trigger detection 1 Log in as tech or central 2 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Triggers page set one or more chan nels to use the configured trigger algorithm for that channel Options are enabled y not enabled Factory default is not enabled 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart The Taurus will create a trigger channel with a data packet for each trigger You can extract the trigger data as SOH information to a csv file Section
210. lue The factory default value is 1 0 that is no change in amplitude This feature can be used to adjust the sensitivity of a station to match a desired value For example if a specific site has a sensitivity of 0 8 cnt nm s s and you want all sta tions in the network to have a sensitivity of 1 cnt nm s s you can set the Software Gain in this station to 1 25 You can normalize the sensitivity of each station by adjusting the Software Gain or you can choose to create a different baseband response file a seed rsp file for each station and use this file during data analysis at the central site 8 1 2 5 Enable Hard Clip A sigma delta convertor output can transition sharply overscale if the input signal is near or exceeds the full scale input range creating spikes in the output that may also transition down into the range The Enable Hard Clip feature cuts off the spikes that exceed the expected full scale limit by replacing samples that are over scale with the specified limit The effect of the Digitizer output spiking at full scale may still be evi dent even with hard clipping on as these spikes can also transition down within the nor mal operating range of the Digitizer even though the input is at or above full scale 8 1 3 Triggers settings The Taurus can be configured to detect events using a LTA STA trigger algorithm on one or more of the 3 time series data channels You can define a trigger algorithm for each channel
211. masses Mass Lock Unlock You can send mass lock and mass unlock commands Itis recommended that you disable the mass auto centring setting Auto Center on Red before you connect a sensor that has masses locked Once you unlock the masses you may enable Auto Center on Red See step 4 on page 87 in Section 9 2 1 1 Edit an existing sensor configuration Sensor On Off Sensor On will pass the Taurus supply voltage through to the sensor power pin see Appendix B Connector Pinouts Note For sensors that require regulated power an appropriate DC DC conver tor must be built into the sensor cable Calibration Start Abort You can start a sensor calibration and abort a sensor calibration that is in progress The process will use settings from the Calibration page see Section 9 3 Configuring calibration on page 91 gt Itis recommended that you disable mass auto centring during calibrations Once the calibration has finished you may enable mass auto centring See step 4 on page 87 in Section 9 2 1 1 Edit an existing sensor configuration 84 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors 9 1 2 2 Mass auto centring You can configure the Mass Auto Centering feature Figure 9 2 on page 86 to initiate mass centring attempts when sensor mass positions reach off centre thresholds You can set thresholds for a delayed or an immediate recent
212. me automat ically Phase options are loaded according to what would be available for an event at that location relative to the Taurus location at the time the data were recorded 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 11 3 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 11 Accessing Data Figure 11 7 Options to select time by phase for Taurus to search for the event Data Retrieval Y Choose the start and end times to download Pre Event Time fo sec Start Phase P y Post Event Time fi 80 sec End Phase Use Start Phase v Use Start Phase Arrival times for P e calculated using I amp SPEI 91 Travel Time Tables with the Tau algorithm Selected Events 16 061E 5km 3 4M Next 7 Click Next to search the Taurus data for the event gt If there are no data for the selected event you may choose to search for another event using the currently uploaded list Under Current Choices click the Change Event link to reopen the list 8 If there are data for the event you can extract it to a file of any of 3 formats MiniSEED The extracted file uses a 512 byte Data Record Length The current version cannot download more than 488 MB of data in Mini SEED format Use multiple downloads for quantities of data that exceed 488MB e Seisan Extracted files have been tested with Seisan 8 0 The current version cannot download more than 488 MB of data in Seisan format Use multiple downloads for quantities of data that exceed 48
213. mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including but not lim ited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intention ally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity
214. ment syntax for the file for mat We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third party archives Copyright yyyy name of copyright owner Licensed under the Apache License Version 2 0 the License you may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License E 3 Bouncy Castle License License Copyright c 2000 2004 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle http www bouncycastle org Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute subli cense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur nished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substan tial portions of t
215. ming configuration Page 6 eee 79 Sensor PAGO A Baden Se ey be 84 Sensor configuration pages s sasaaa cette ee 86 Add a sensor configuration manually o ooooccccocco ee 89 Delete a sensor configuration 0 2 00 eae 90 Upload a sensor configuration 0 2 0 eae 91 Calibration page vest hn od M rara a dew Loves 92 Small Media example 00 00 ccc nts 96 Delete the Store and create anewone 000s 98 Shut down the Controller liliis 99 Open the media d00r oococcccoc nn 100 xi Figures 10 5 Replacing the recording media 00 eae 100 10 6 Unformatted media Opti0NS o ooocccocccocna ae 102 10 7 Formatted media options liliis 103 10 8 Switch media and create a new Store tees 104 11 1 Data Retrieval main page 0 eae 106 11 2 Data Retrieval page navigation 20 eae 107 11 3 Edit Station Info for the current download session llle ceca eee 107 11 4 Playback configuration page 00 ee eee 108 11 5 Download an event list file then Upload it to the Taurus 0 000 112 11 6 Choose an event from an uploaded liSt oooooccoocococro ooo 113 11 7 Options to select time by phase for Taurus to search for the event 114 11 8 Choose an SOH data set s ieaiai tena na naet naaa aae Saana aaa LA 116 11 9 Choose Trigger as an individual SOH column ooococoocococooo eee 118 11 1
216. mode 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 Factory default is 9600 Local IP IP address for the local PPP interface in dotted decimal format for example 10 0 0 1 Remote IP IP address for the remote PPP interface in dotted decimal format for example 10 0 0 1 Connection Type Specifies the nature of the connection Options are direct and dial in Direct is a direct connection to the Taurus via a serial cable or a transparent serial modem line For dial in the Taurus accepts a PPP connection request from a client using a dial up modem Modem init string The modem initialization string for dial in for example AT8F1 OK Factory default is empty Extra modem init string An additional modem initialization string for dial in for example ATS0 0 OK Factory default is empty Authentication Indicates if authentication is required from the PPP client Factory default is enabled authentication required 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 95 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 19 PPP page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 2 3 4 TDMA The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 1 gt TDMA page pro vides options to set up time slot access for this Taurus to a SLIP link Table H 20
217. mpts 48 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access Figure 6 1 Open the Log In page Log In F Userld ES Password e hi SSW Or 6 1 1 2 Quick login There are two ways to log in using the display Standard and Quick Login You can configure Taurus to use Quick Login for local authentication It allows logging in with out having to enter or know the password for the account for example if a local user only needs to log in to swap media Quick Login is available on the display only Browser access to accounts always requires that you enter the UserID and Password whether or not Quick Login is configured Once Quick Login is configured the display Log In page will show an additional but ton Log In as configuredUserID Choose the correct UserID from the drop down list if it is not already selected then click the Log In as configuredUserID button To configure Quick Login or change back to Standard login 1 Log in as central and open the Advanced Configuration gt Security page 2 Choose Quick Login from the Local Authentication drop down list and then choose the appropriate account from the Login Account drop down list Figure 6 2 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart Similarly you can change
218. mware only if you are logged in as cent ral see also Table 6 1 User permissions on page 47 Availability of some options also depends on whether you are using a browser or the display for example data retrieval is available only via a browser 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 75 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 1 Taurus Ul page map Go to the page number indicated for a description of the UI page and its parameters Status p 177 Waveform p 180 SOH p 181 Alerts p 181 Data Availability p 181 Month p 182 Week p 182 Day p 182 Text p 182 Time Series p 182 Time Series band p 183 Other p 183 Other band p 183 Data Retrieval p 183 Time Series p 184 Browser only Time Series By Event p 185 State of Health p 186 System Logs p 187 System Configuration p 187 Timing p 187 Timing p 187 GPS Satellites p 188 GPS Map p 189 Sensor p 189 Store Tools p 190 Configuration p 190 Log in to access System Info p 191 Advanced Configuration p 191 General p 192 Log in to access Communications p 193 Ethernet p 193 Data Streaming p 194 Serial Port 1 p 194 SLIP p 195 Raw p 195 PPP p 195 TDMA p 196 Serial Port 2 p 196 Discovery p 196 Security p 197 Playback p 197
219. n based on the geometry of the visible satellites A lower value indicates a more precise solution The GPS receiver will not generate a solution if the PDOP is too high TDOP Time dilution of precision A standard estimate of the GPS time precision based on the geometry of the visible satellites A lower value indicates a more precise solution Location Latitude The current latitude of the Taurus Longitude The current longitude of the Taurus Altitude The current altitude of the Taurus in metres H 8 2 GPS Satellites The GPS Satellites page shows information about each usable GPS satellite Table H 7 Table H 7 GPS Satellites page options Parameter Description PRN The PRN pseudo random noise code used to identify each satellite Status The tracking status for this satellite Elevation The elevation angle of the satellite in degrees It ranges from 0 to 90 0 is parallel to the surface of the Earth Azimuth The azimuth of the satellite in degrees measured clockwise from true North Signal The strength of the signal in AMUs antenna measurement unit a measure of signal to noise ratio to convert C Ng 27 20log10 SNR AMUs Last Updated The System Time when the GPS receiver last updated the information for a specific satellite see also Table 8 1 Taurus time definitions on page 79 188 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09
220. n menu or click a hyperlink the UI timeout will start counting again from that operation This applies to selections made either by pressing the centre key on the Taurus keypad or by using a browser Ifyou have started a data download in Buffered mode the Controller will run long enough to complete the download and will override the configured UI timeout if necessary Ifyou click Turn Off Display in the Shutdown page Interactive mode will end immediately The Taurus will then operate in the configured running mode In Buffered mode if a data download is in progress Turn Off Display will ter minate the download 3 1 3 Buffered mode If the Taurus is configured to Buffered mode Buffered mode starts automatically when Interactive mode ends Buffered mode consumes the least power of the 3 operating modes see Section A 13 Power on page 127 for specifications Running in this mode the Taurus continues to buffer data and wakes the Controller only to write data to the Store when the buffer is full The time it takes for the buffer to fill ranges from a few minutes to several hours depending on the number of active channels input signal activity the sample rate and the size of the buffer in your Taurus 2 MB on units with serial number 0353 0375 0379 and higher 1 MB on all other units for example about 30 minutes for 3 channels at 100sps and 2MB RAM There is no IP access to the Taurus once it is running in Buffered mode
221. nactive medium you will be prompted to create one Choose a capacity for the new Store from the Store Size drop down list e Ifa Store already exists on the inactive medium you will be prompted to con firm whether you want to use that Store The Taurus will append data to that Store see also Section 10 2 1 1 About appended Stores on page 96 If you do not want to append data to the existing Store you can either delete the Store after you have switched media or format the inactive medium before you choose Switch Media Formatting will destroy all data and par tition information on the medium 3 Click Proceed Figure 10 8 Switch media and create a new Store M Store Tools Store Tools Y SH 105 7 Store Tools Switch Media Y Active Media Compact Flash Available Space 34 77 GB Active Store Size 797 03 MB Sara Sie MB FU Store Space Used 48 50 MB T d Are you sure you wal from Compact Flash to a new IDE Available ts cc mee Switch Media he Proceed Format iOS Store Tools Menu 1 04 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Accessing Data This chapter provides an overview of general methods for accessing data from Taurus Stores and procedures for retrieving specific types of data 11 1 General options for accessing data Time series data and SOH system configuration and log information are stored in the Nanometrics Store You can extract data from the S
222. nd CMG V3E STS 2 cfg this applies to the Streckeisen STS 2 Passive cfg except for the sensitivity this applies to all passive sensors 9 2 2 1 Upload a predefined sensor configuration An uploaded sensor configuration file will replace all sensor configurations in the Tau rus with the configurations in the uploaded file For example if the uploaded file con tains only one sensor configuration and the Taurus currently has four configurations that one configuration will replace the entire list of four The new sensor configuration is applied automatically on upload so Reset will not have an effect You can undo the uploaded sensor configuration if you have not com mitted it yet see Section 5 4 2 Undo applied changes on page 45 B Note The predefined configuration files set the control lines based on assumed sensor cable wiring for the sensor type Before you use the configuration check your sensor cable wiring and the control line assignments in the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details gt Sensor Control Lines page 90 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Log in as tech or central In the Advanced Configuration page browse for a sensor configuration file and then click Upload Figure 9 5 If required edit the Sensitivity Value for example for passive sensors or operating modes in the Advanced Configuration gt S
223. ndix F gt You can transfer the files from the Taurus to your PC via a means such as FTP Ensure FTP is set to binary transfer gt If you are using a media reader on Linux note that some Linux versions will not detect a removable hard drive or CompactFlash card if the PC was not booted with the device attached After booting with the removable HD or CF they can be removed and exchanged for other media which will be detected If you are using a media reader on Windows there are various third party utilities available for you to access the files directly for example Ext2IFS and Explore2fs gt Ext2 Installable File System For Windows Ext2IFS provides a file system driver to include Ext3 volumes as fully accessible drives on Windows filesys tems and a control panel item for assigning drive letters to Ext3 volumes http www fs driver org index html gt Explore2fs provides an Explorer type graphical user interface for reading files and for copying files from an Ext3 file system http uranus it swin edu au jn linux explore2fs old htm for general informa tion and http www chrysocome net explore2fs for software updates Caution As of Explore2fs version 1 07 do not drag and drop a 1 GB file from the medium as this will allocate 1GB of shared memory on the PC Use the File gt Save As menu option instead The Save As option supports saving of multiple files 11 2 Retrieving time series data You can retrieve time serie
224. nected to a local network LAN using the supplied Ethernet cable 15228 or equivalent You will require a Windows or Linux PC with an Internet browser to upload the new firmware and install it 1 72 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix G Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures Taurus Versions 2 xx and higher provide an Upgrade page for firmware updates and upgrade file management Follow this general procedure to use the Upgrade page Warning Taurus Versions 2 00 16 and earlier use a data Store that is incom A patible with versions higher than 2 00 16 Ensure that you download or back up your Store before upgrading to a version higher than 2 00 16 as the upgrade will delete the old Store 9 Note The installation files will require about 50MB of space on the recording medium 1 Obtain the Taurus firmware upgrade package a taurus release releaseNumber tgz file and place it in a convenient folder on the Windows or Linux PC you will use to connect to the Taurus 2 Boot the Taurus in normal mode 3 Log in under the central account a On the Taurus menu choose Log In b Enter the UserID central and the account Password the initial default pass word is central then click Log In 4 Ensure the Taurus is set to Communications mode see Section 3 1 About the Taurus operating modes on page 17 5 Ina browser on the Windows or Linux PC choose Upgrade from the Taurus menu If there are
225. net and at any major bookstore scientific library and patent office worldwide More information can be found e g at http www cs hut fi crypto The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions and restrictions Use only at your own responsibility You will be responsible for any legal consequences your self Iam not making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country and I am not taking any responsibility on your behalf NO WARRANTY BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WAR RANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORM ANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFEC TIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRIT ING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
226. nfigure Taurus to operate with your sensor and then calibrate the sensor See Section H 13 7 Sensor Details on page 199 for descriptions of the con figuration parameters 1 Configure Taurus for the installed sensor either by uploading a preset configura tion file or by manually editing settings Some sensor configurations Sensor Details Sensor Control Lines and Mass Auto Centering settings are included with this software release in the sensors directory You may upload one of these configurations at a time to the Taurus using the Advanced Configuration page options Section 9 2 2 Using predefined sensor configurations on page 90 For passive sensor configurations in the Sensor Details page you must also enter the appropriate sensitivity Uploading a sensor configuration file will replace all existing sensor configura tions on the Taurus with the uploaded configuration If you are entering the sensor configuration manually in the Advanced Config uration gt Sensor Details gt Sensor Control Lines page configure the control line parameters as appropriate for the installed sensor The assert and deassert levels The control pulse duration The default function of each line Which lines are to be asserted during the calibration 2 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Calibration page configure the type of calibra tion the channels to calibrate and the calibration waveform parameters 3 To start t
227. nfigured but there is no link Figure 3 8 EtherLED location Ethernet status LED 3 8 2 4 Media status LED MediaLED The LED inside the media door Figure 3 9 indicates whether it is safe to remove or insert recording media either an IDE hard drive or a CF card see also Section 10 3 1 Insert and remove recording media on page 99 Table 3 4 describes the status indi cated by the various LED states 28 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus Table 3 4 MediaLED states LED state Media status Red It is not safe to insert or remove recording media as the Controller is running Shut down the Controller before removing or inserting recording media This does not stop the Digitizer or cause data gaps Green It is safe to remove or insert recording media as the Controller is shut down Figure 3 9 MediaLED location Media status LED 3 8 3 Status bars The status bars on the Status page are to help with interpreting the LEDs the colour will match the relevant LED and a brief text label will summarize the problem In gen eral see also the relevant entries in Table H 1 on page 177 for details on each status bar A bar with a green background indicates good status A bar with a yellow background and with text followed by a question mark indi cates Taurus is acquiring status information A status bar with a red bac
228. nge the Playback configuration for the TauruUS oooo oooomo o 107 Initial setup for extracting to Seisan format 00 0c eee eee eee 108 Accessing Store files on the recording media with your PC 109 Retrieving time series data 0 ce ee eens 109 Extract time series datatoafile lille 109 Extract seismic data to a file by event from an eventliSt 111 Stream time series data to a central acquisition Server o o o oooo 115 Retrieving Other data coi its hr PY ER eed deeb EEG EA ett RE qd E RED 116 Extract State of Health data to a csvfile llis 116 Extract trigger data toa csv M si cansi sinian aa a a ea a Ta 118 Extract system logs to a 1og file llle 119 Download the configuration audit trail to a cfg file ooo oooooooo 119 Download Taurus system information to a iq file o o oo oooooooo 120 Download the current configuration to a cfgfile o oooooooooo 120 dl AAA A A A hee 123 Sensor Inpllts Austin daa ea oars a eas 123 Digitizer perforMance o oooooococono hne 123 SENSO SUDDO akaiita cera ds da Skea yak ed 124 THMING SUBSYSIOM a nes Wwe eee GA Leh Shee whee eh ars 124 State Of Health SOM oooocccccocco n 124 Internal data Storage taa a ka eee 125 Data reta cet rere esc Sete Pi rs caida 125 Real time data communication llle 125 Integrated Ul i22 kem an e
229. ngs on page 9 For example Running mode e Sample rate Sensor configuration see also Section 2 7 3 Sensor configuration considera tions on page 14 Playback settings 3 Install and level the sensor 4 Mount the GPS antenna with a good view of the sky and ensure that the antenna cable is installed with sufficient strain relief for example Figure 2 5 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 5 User Guide Chapter 2 Quick Start Figure 2 5 Mount the GPS antenna shows optional bullet antenna Ensure that the system is properly grounded Ensure that a supported recording medium is installed in the Taurus media slot Connect the sensor to the Taurus 0 Q9 Y If you will be accessing the Taurus over a network connect the Taurus Ethernet cable or a serial cable see also Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 9 Power up the Taurus Connect the power cable to start the Taurus up in the mode it was in before the last shutdown It will take the Taurus a minute or two to boot While the unit is booting the display will be off and the LEDs will indicate status Section 3 8 2 Status LEDs on page 26 About 2 minutes after connecting power you can start the display Press and hold the centre key for about 1 second It may take a minute for the display to start up 10 In the Sensor page turn on the sensor power for an active sensor and unlock the masses if require
230. nk 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 59 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 7 3 4 3 1 Taurus configuration for CSLIP connection gt To use CSLIP follow the procedures for SLIP Section 7 3 4 1 on page 57 with this change For step 7 set protocol to CSLIP 7 3 4 3 2 Windows XP configuration for CSLIP connection 1 Complete the procedure described in 7 3 4 2 on page 58 2 Goto Control Panel gt Network Connections and right click on ComputerName connection 3 Goto the Networking tab and double click on Internet Protocol TCP IP or click on it and choose Properties 4 Click Advanced Set Use IP Header Compression to enabled 6 Click OK in each window until you exit 7 3 5 Configuring TDMA over SLIP You can configure Serial Port 1 for TDMA over a SLIP link The link typically would use a pair of transparent serial radio modems to communicate with a shared Nanomet rics comms device such as a Janus Communications Controller TDMA parameters are configured on both the Taurus and the Janus therefore param eter values such as frame length must be set appropriately on both instruments for each Taurus Janus link The Taurus and Janus use their GPS derived system time to calculate TDMA slot tim ing If the Taurus system timing status is not good status is not Green data streaming is disabled until timing status is good again See table row Timing status bar on pag
231. no t gz files currently uploaded to the Taurus the Upgrade page on a browser will show only the option to browse for an upgrade file Figure G 1 The display will not have any options showing 6 Ina browser click Browse and locate the Taurus upgrade package you want to use ataurus release tgz file Click Upload to upload the taurus release releaseNumber tgz file to the Taurus 7 The Upgrade page will now show the remaining upgrade management options These options are also available on the Taurus display gt Install Install the selected firmware package and start it up as the active ver sion gt Delete Remove the selected firmware upgrade file from the Taurus gt Commit Set the currently running version of the firmware as default Revert Reboot Taurus and run the default version of the firmware 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 73 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix G Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures Figure G 1 Upgrade options before and after uploading a tgz file to the Taurus Bv Upgrade X aurus Installation ose EES ipload Transfer a Taurus release or an Apollo license to a aurus device aurus Installation pload Successful Browse Upload ipload Transfer a Taurus release or an Apollo license to a aurus device taurus release 2 00 16 tgz y Jrs site conme rev Install Install the selected Taurus version and start it up Delete
232. nouts Colour display screen display SuperLED indicates Taurus unit status Keypad see also Section 3 4 Using the Taurus keypad on page 22 lt Press and hold the centre key for about 1 second to start the Taurus see also Section 3 3 Starting up and shutting down the Taurus on page 19 Media door see also Section 10 3 1 Insert and remove recording media on page 99 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 7 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 2 Quick Start Figure 2 2 Taurus subsystems block diagram Communications Taurus Controller Digitizer data storage and communications Integrated User Interface always on in Communications mode is always on colour display and keypad in Buffered mode turns on periodically display on only in Interactive mode Sensor to write data to the media Analog to Digitizer in Interactive mode is always on O Digital butter Convertor x A CF IDE card drive See also Section A 13 Power on page 127 for typical power consumption specifications Section 3 1 About the Taurus operating modes on page 17 and Section 8 2 1 GPS receiver duty cycle on page 79 2 2 Verify operation of a Taurus To check basic operation of a Taurus Connect the GPS antenna a Place the GPS antenna where it has a good view of the sky ideally
233. ns affect all configuration pages not just the page on which the Apply Reset or Commit was executed Note Itis recommended that you have only one browser session at a time being used for configuration changes For example if you are running two browsers simultaneously external and internal and performing configu ration changes via both you must click the Reset button on the configu ration page each time you switch from one browser to the other 5 4 1 Change the configuration 1 Log in with the appropriate level of access See Chapter 6 for information on user permissions and logging in 2 Change the configuration parameter to the new value You may make multiple changes in different configuration pages These changes will be included in the same transaction for example if you click Apply in any page all changes made in all pages will be applied The Advanced Configuration sub pages have a Previous button for moving back up the hierarchy of pages while caching any unapplied changes gt Ina browser use the Previous button not the browser s Back button to ensure that unapplied changes are preserved 44 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 5 Changing a Taurus Configuration 3 Once you have changed the values you can test them discard them or make them permanent gt You can apply the changes to test the new configuration without making it per manent Click Apply and then w
234. nsure the Controller is shut down before removing or inserting recording media This does not turn off the Digitizer which continues to collect and buffer data See also Section 10 3 1 Insert and remove recording media on page 99 The Controller will remain shut down if the media door is left open and you do not restart it by pressing the centre key If the media door is left open for longer than it takes for the buffer to fill data in the buffer will start to be overwritten starting with the oldest data The time elapsed before the buffer fills depends on factors such as the number of active channels sample rate seismic signal and noise and buffer size 2MB on units with serial number 0353 0375 0379 and higher 1MB on all other units This will range from a few minutes to several hours for exam ple about 30 minutes for 3 channels at 100sps and a 2MB buffer It is recommended that you use Shutdown to shut down the Controller before dis connecting the power If you disconnect the power while the Controller is running you may lose data presently cached in the buffer This can be about 15 seconds of data if the Taurus is running in Communications mode and up to several hours of data if the Taurus is running in Buffered mode depending on factors such as the sample rate and number of channels configured Also if the Store is not closed down properly it may need to perform a lengthy reindexing on the next startup see Section 10 2 3
235. nt L SEN CAL3 mode Z CAL1 CTRL4 Sensor calibration signal return Calibration signal return or 6 CAL2 CTRL5 Sensor control signal outputs OV 5V 12V high impedance Y ER Referenced to DGND V DGND Digital ground Digital ground F SEN V Sensor power supply Filtered unregulated voltage E SEN V Reserved for future use N C D SEN RTN Sensor power return Switched overcurrent protected b CHGND Chassis Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 31 User Guide Appendix B Connector Pinouts B 2 GPS Antenna Figure B 2 GPS antenna connector receptacle a GPS_ANT Table B 2 GPS antenna connector pinout Pin Function A GPS antenna signal and power Shell GPS ground isolated from Taurus chassis B 3 Power Figure B 3 Power connector receptacle ze ONE PWR RTN PWR Table B 3 Power connector pinout Pin Function A Raw battery power in 9 V to 36V DC B Raw power supply earth Raw power return 132 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix B Connector Pinouts B 4 Serial USB Figure B 4 Serial USB connector receptacle S1 CTS S1 R1 OUT S2 RX S2 TX S1 DTR S1_PWR S1_PWR QR ONONO SI DSR SI RX S1 TX S GND USB_D USB VBUS Si DCD S2 RTS ysB D USB GND S2 CTS GP IN Y Re S1 RTS Table B 4 Serial USB connector pinout
236. nt Taurus will start appending data to one of the existing Stores gt It is recommended that you do not use existing Stores created on other Tauruses You can insert media with existing Stores You may then either delete the existing Store s or format the medium and create a new Store to record data from the cur rent Taurus Section 10 2 2 Delete a Store on page 97 Section 10 3 2 2 Format previously formatted media on page 102 If you do use a combined Store note the following A Store incorporates the serial number of the Taurus on which it was created as a means of identifying that Store The filenames will use the original Taurus serial number The original data channels in that Store remain intact until the Store wraps When the Store wraps oldest data are always removed first regardless of which Taurus created those data All channels ever created in the Store will always have at least 2MB of data in the Store Apollo Light can be used to see what is actually in each Store since the filename may not indicate the source of all data in that Store See also Appendix F Apollo Light Utility The Data Availability pages behave as follows The Month view will always calculate percentage of data available based on the up to 3 time series channels of the current Taurus ignoring other data in the Store This is true both on the display and browsers The Week and Day views have these characteristics
237. o a Linux Ext3 file system For recording media specifications see Section A 6 on page 125 See Chapter 10 Recording Data in particular Section 10 3 1 Insert and remove recording media on page 99 for more detailed information Warning You could damage the Store or the recording media if you remove the media while the Controller is running Do not remove or insert media if the MediaLED is red Wait until the Controller has shut down and the MediaLED is green 1 The Controller must be shut down before you remove or insert recording media To shut down the Controller if it is running gt In the Shutdown page choose Shutdown 2 Open the media door Figure 10 4 on page 100 3 Do not remove or insert media if the MediaLED is red Wait until the Controller has shut down and the MediaLED is green Figure 10 5 on page 100 4 Remove or insert recording media as required 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 1 User Guide Chapter 2 Quick Start 5 Close the media door Closing the media door will start the Controller gt If you want to start the display press the centre key for about 1 second The dis play will start up once the Controller has finished booting Once you have inserted media you may be prompted to choose setup options depend ing on factors such as whether the media are already formatted If you have inserted a formatted medium of the same type that previously contained t
238. o to the Advanced Configuration page and click Download then select a desti nation and save the file 1 20 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendices Specifications Connector Pinouts Sensor Digitizer Interconnection Filter Response Open Source Free Software Information Apollo Light Utility Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures Ul Pages and Parameters Specifications A 1 Sensor inputs Channels 3 standard selectable 0 1 2 or 3 active Sampling Simultaneous Hardware gain selection Software configurable 0 4 1 2 4 8 peak to peak input range 40V 16V 8V 4V 2V Maximum input voltage range 40V pp differential at hardware gain 0 4 Maximum single ended voltage 1 56V 3 12Vop or 3 6V 7 2Vop selectable These limits apply to all gain settings Maximum common mode signal 0 78V 1 56 Vip or 1 8V 3 6Vop selectable These limits apply to all gain settings Nominal sensitivity 1 count uV at hardware gain 1 Input impedance Selectable low impedance 43 07kQ 0 2 or high impedance gt 9MQ A 2 Digitizer performance Type Proprietary high order sigma delta Digital filter 140dB attenuation at output Nyquist Filter type Linear phase consult factory for other options Dynamic range gt 141dB maximum sine wave above shorted input level at 100sps Shorted input noise lt 1 counts RMS of 24 bits at
239. ody of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of fol lowing the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copy righted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WAR RANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WIT
240. on cannot download more than 488 MB of data in MiniSEED format or Seisan for mat Use multiple downloads for quantities of data that exceed 488MB Mini SEED files use a 512 byte Data Record Length Seisan downloads use a conversion tool Section 11 1 3 3 Initial setup for extracting to Seisan format on page 108 Change Station Info Edit station information that will be used in the downloaded data file headers You can change Network Name Station Name and Channel Names Change Event Choose a different event from the event list The page may take a minute to load if there is a large list of events Clear All Choices Reset all options to the defaults including deleting the uploaded event file Table H 4 Time Series by Event file upload options Parameter Widget Description File format Choose the type of event list file to upload click the radio button Each link opens the relevant site search page in a new window Options include IRIS Search ASCII http Awww iris edu quakes eventsrch htm Do a search then save using the ASCII Version link Upload the ASCII version to Taurus NEIC Epic Search Compressed http neic usgs gov neis epic Choose a search type Global Rectangular or Circular then choose 2 Compressed File For mat for the output file type Save then upload the search to the Taurus as htm1 NEIC Finger http neic usgs gov neis finger quake asc Save the document quake asc and up
241. ons as well as an Interactive mode which is on only while the display is active Once the display shuts down the Taurus operates in the configured running mode Buffered mode is the most 1 0 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 2 Quick Start 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 4 power efficient whereas Communications mode allows continuous access via an IP connection See also Section 3 1 About the Taurus operating modes on page 17 gt Choose the Running mode from either the Configuration page or the Advanced Configuration General page The change will be permanent after a Commit Number of channels gt Choose the number of channels from either the Configuration page or the Advanced Configuration General page The change will be permanent after a Commit Digitizer sample rate gt Choose the Digitizer sample rate from either the Configuration page or the Advanced Configuration Digitizer Main page The change will be permanent after a Commit Playback settings Downloaded data files will use the network and station definitions as entered on the Advanced Configuration Playback page gt Enter appropriate values on the Advanced Configuration gt Playback page The change will be permanent after a Commit 2 4 Install recording media IDE hard drive or CF card Taurus can record to a CompactFlash card CF or a 1 8 ATA hard drive IDE hard drive formatted t
242. op down list first It is available if the Taurus has been configured for Quick Login Log In Log in using the specified Userld and Password Reset Clears all existing entries on the current page Change Password This link opens the Change Password page see Section H 15 1 Table H 38 Log Off page options Parameter Widget Description Log Off Click Log Off to exit the current session To exit this page without logging off choose any other page option from the main menu You can continue working in the current session H 15 1 Change Password The Log In gt Change Password page provides options for you to set a new password for any of the user accounts Table H 39 Table H 39 Change Password page options Parameter Widget Description Userld A text field to enter the UserID for which to change password Current Password A text field to enter the current password for the specified Userld New Password A text field to enter the new password The password must be at least 4 alphanumeric characters long It is case sensitive Verify New Password A text field to retype New Password as confirmation Change Password Saves the New Password and logs you in to that account Reset Click to clear all field entries applicable only if you have not yet clicked Change Password 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 207 Ap
243. or matted media in the inactive slot the Taurus will indicate that the media are available Different options will be available depending on media status Figure 10 7 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 2007 02 09 Chapter 10 Recording Data For media that are already formatted to Ext3 you can format the inactive medium only If you want to reformat the active medium you can install both media types switch to the other medium then format If you just want to reuse a medium with an old Store and do not need to reformat it you can delete the Store and create a new one see Section 10 2 on page 98 Figure 10 7 Formatted media options VY Store Tools Y SL Y Store Tools Y SN 22 O Login Successful Login Successful Active Media IDE Active Media IDE i Active Store Size 31 29 GB Active Store Size 31 29 GB Store Space Used 5 42 GB Store Space Used 5 42 GB Compact Flash Available Yes Compact Flash Available No or not formatted Y en Directory ide store does not exist Active Media NONE Current Configuration IDE IDE Available No or not formatted CF Available Yes zn Switch Media Format IDE 1 If you need to insert the medium you want to format first shut down the Controller Shutdown Shutdown See Section 10 3 1 Insert and remove recording media on page 99 for procedure details Do not remove or insert media if the MediaLED is red Wait until the Cont
244. ors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM AGE E 7 OpenBSD License This file is part of the OpenSSH software The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows First we will sum marize and say that all components are under a BSD licence or a licence more free than that OpenSSH contains no GPL code 1 Copyright c 1995 Tatu Ylonen lt ylo cs hut fi gt Espoo Finland All rights reserved As far as I am concerned the code I have written for this software can be used freely for any purpose Any derived versions of this software must be clearly marked as such and if the derived work is incompatible with t
245. ot 4 4 Configuring power manager settings The Advanced Configuration gt Power page provides options to configure power sup ply parameters such as disconnect levels and delays Figure 4 3 When the external supply voltage falls below the Battery Low threshold and remains below this threshold for Delay Low period the Taurus powers off immediately When the external supply voltage rises above the Hysteresis Low threshold a low voltage reconnect value the Taurus powers up but not before 10 seconds has elapsed since the last shutdown Set the low voltage disconnect values so as to properly protect the bat tery chemistry for your power supply and set the reconnect value high enough to pre vent the unit from prematurely turning on due to battery rebound Voltage drops in long power supply cables should also be considered in determining these values If the supply voltage is lower than the configured Battery Low value or higher than the Battery High value the Taurus will not power up You can bypass these voltage dis connect settings on power up see Section 4 3 3 2 When the external supply voltage rises above the Battery High threshold and remains above this threshold for Delay High period the Taurus powers off immediately When the external supply voltage drops below the Hysteresis High threshold a high voltage reconnect value the Taurus powers up but not before 10 seconds has elapsed since the last shutdown 4 4 1 Configure power
246. ound The Taurus Controller subsystem is isolated from the Digitizer and has its own Controller ground which is used for the Serial and USB interfaces For sensor cables the chassis ground should be connected to the outer shield of the cable which is connected to the chassis of the sensor The channel grounds are connected to the channel twisted pair shield The control lines use digital ground and there must be a digital ground connection to the sensor Sensor power return is connected to primary ground General considerations Power The Taurus power connector has 3 pins to allow the Taurus to conform to the site grounding system You can connect the power return pin and ground but combining grounding and power return in the same conductor limits the site grounding options Our preferred practice is to establish a single ground point for the station and ground everything to that point which minimizes the chances of ground loops and signal noise created by the power system Peripheral power The Taurus provides primary power to attached peripheral devices via the Sensor Serial and NMX Bus connectors This power is switched to allow devices to be controlled by the user through the Taurus The Taurus mon itors for over current conditions and will automatically switch off power to a peripheral if excessive current or a short is detected See Section A 13 Power on page 127 for the typical current limit threshold of each peripheral
247. own list Set the Local IP to the IP address of the local SLIP interface pent oO on Bow m Set Remote IP to the IP address of the remote SLIP interface 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 57 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 10 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 7 3 4 2 Windows XP configuration for SLIP connection Note SLIP connections do not work on Windows XP Service Pack 1 In order to set serial direct connection on Windows XP you must upgrade to Win dow XP Version 5 1 2600 Service Pack 2 Build 2600 or higher This example procedure is for a direct cable connection 1 LB 0 n RB Connect the hardware and remove potentially conflicting settings a Build a serial cable and connect to your PCs working COM port normally COM I For example use a DB 9 connector and the connector from the optional Taurus Connector Kit part number 15170 See also Appendix B Connector Pinouts If your link drops frequently use a serial cable having a PC serial connector DB 9 with pins 7 8 RTS CTS shorted and pins 1 4 6 CD DTR DSR shorted Some motherboards PC hardware require a full loop back serial cable to maintain a connection b Close all serial port applications such as Hyper terminal Teraterm c Ensure all modems
248. parameters Static IP Address The IP address for the Taurus in the selected network Static Subnet Mask Identifies which portion of the IP address is the net work ID and which is the host ID Static Default Gateway The IP address of the gateway device for remote network visibility None The Ethernet interface will be disabled This will conserve some small amount of power but will restrict access to the Taurus to be via the display and keypad This parameter is not associated with serial configuration in any way 5 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 7 3 Communications over serial Taurus provides two serial ports Serial Port 1 can be configured to use SLIP or PPP for link control and establishment with a further option to use TDMA on a SLIP link Serial Port 2 does not support networking The shipping default configuration for both ports is Raw 9600bps Serial Port 1 PPP SLIP Raw TDMA A full 9 pin RS232 serial port designed for communication with a PC via dial up modem or a direct connection Configu ration options are in the Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 1 pages Serial Port 2 Raw only A basic serial port that has transmit and receive lines for a character stream for connection to a serial device Port speed is configure
249. pendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 16 Shutdown The Shutdown page provides options for you to safely shut down the Taurus Controller Table H 40 See also Section 3 3 Starting up and shutting down the Taurus on page 19 Table H 40 Shutdown page options Widget Description Turn Off Display Use this option to turn off Interactive mode without waiting for the UI timeout for example to conserve power once you have finished using the display The Taurus continues to record data in its configured running mode either Buffered or Communications gt If you use Turn Off Display in a browser do not refresh the old browser window after the Controller has been restarted as this will resubmit the turn off display command Restart Use this option to restart the Controller referred to as the PPC on the Shutdown page for example to activate any committed configuration changes that require a reboot to take effect The Digitizer continues to run and buffer data during a restart so no data are lost gt If you use Restart in a browser do not refresh the old browser win dow after the Controller has been restarted as this will resubmit the restart command Shutdown Use this option before you remove or insert recording media or before you disconnect the power It powers down the Controller gracefully while the Taurus continues to buffer data gt If you use Shutdown in a browser do not refresh the old browser window after
250. ple The prin ciples apply in general to connecting high performance sensors to high resolution dig itizers Recommended sensor cable wiring for connecting the Taurus to various sensors is provided in Table C 3 on page 143 Note The Taurus is designed for best dynamic range performance when used with sensors having differential outputs See Section C 5 on page 142 for information on Digitizer operation with single ended inputs C 1 Circuit description C 1 1 Digitizer High resolution digitizers will always have differential input circuits however they will differ in their input impedance RF suppression and common mode rejection It is also important to determine whether or not the power supply is isolated The Nanometrics Taurus Digitizer input stage has an input impedance of 43 07kQ low impedance mode or 9 4MQ high impedance mode It has a typical common mode range of approximately 0 78 V low impedance mode or 1 8 V high impedance high power mode with respect to the case The front end is designed with excellent RF suppression so that with properly designed cables the Taurus can be operated in the presence of radios and cell phones The Digitizer power supply is completely isolated from the rest of the electronics and the case The Digitizer also provides state of health inputs and control calibration and sensor power outputs C 1 2 Sensor High performance active seismometers will always have differential output stages
251. power Periph eral power is otherwise unregulated the voltage provided to the Taurus is passed on to the attached peripherals The current demand of each attached peripheral and the consequent voltage drop through the Taurus and peripheral cables should be taken into consideration when designing the power system to ensure that sufficient voltage is supplied to each peripheral Sensor The voltage drop through the Taurus in a typical 12V system is 1 0 peak current draw of the sensor 100mV Add to that the voltage drop in the Taurus power cable power cable resistance in ohms peak current of the Tau rus and all peripherals and the sensor cable sensor cable resistance in ohms peak current of the sensor to ensure that the total voltage drop between the Taurus power supply and the sensor does not cause the voltage at the sensor to fall below its required operating voltage Solutions to problems of excessive voltage drop include heavier gauge cables shorter cables and higher voltage power supplies which lowers the current consumption For example a 12 V system designed to operate down to 10 8 V with a short heavy gauge power cable and a 10m 24 gauge sensor cable 1 750 operating a sensor with a peak current draw of 500mA could see a voltage drop of 1 0 0 500 0 100 1 75 0 500 1 425 V When the battery dips to 10 8 V peak current could cause the voltage at the sensor to drop to 10 8 1 425 9 375 V Serial Simi
252. r gt Ensure the cable is watertight gt Check the cable electrically after assembly In particular ensure that the individual and overall shields are not shorted together unless so specified gt Make sure cables are labelled with correct drawing numbers and revisions gt Make sure the digitizer is configured so that the default states of the control lines put the sensor in the state you want it to be in C 5 Digitizer operation with single ended inputs The Taurus is designed for best dynamic range performance when used with sensors having differential outputs Over a limited voltage range common mode signal compo nents such as unwanted noise induced into the input cable are rejected However com mon mode signals greater than 0 78 V with respect to chassis ground cause distortion Maximum single ended signal before distortion is 2 maximum common mode signal 2 0 78 1 56V Common mode range can be extended by using high impedance high power mode C 5 1 Input range and gain for a single ended signal A single ended signal can be considered as the sum of differential and common mode signals Assume V y is the common mode input to both ve and ve terminals and V qif 2 and V gir 2 are the differential inputs If these are the components to a single ended signal and the ve terminal is connected to GND return then Vem CVqit 2 0 Therefore Ven Vqit 2 At the ve terminal with V Vgi 2 referred
253. r Guide Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors 4 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart Figure 9 4 Delete a sensor configuration Y Sensor Details Sensor Details Sensor test y E Sensor Sensor Name test Sensor Name fet o SPILP Mode SP y SPILP Mode SP y XY ZIUNWW Mode XYZ X XY ZIUNVV Mode XYZ h i alihratian Maa Tuartace wl Calihyation hada oo Tace wl gt You can delete all saved sensor configurations at once by uploading a sensor con figuration file see Section 9 2 2 on page 90 9 2 2 Using predefined sensor configurations You can upload predefined sensor configurations using the Advanced Configuration page and you can create new sensor configuration files by copying and editing existing files See also Chapter 5 Changing a Taurus Configuration for a general discussion of these options The Taurus software CD has a set of predefined sensor configurations as c fg files in the sensors directory Configurations with the current release include Trillium40 cfg this applies to the Nanometrics Trillium 40 Trillium120 cfg this applies to the Nanometrics Trillium 120P Trillium240 cfg this applies to the Nanometrics Trillium 240 and Trillium 240 OBS CMG 3 cfg except for the sensitivity this applies to the Guralp CMG 3ESP CMG 3T CMG T3E a
254. r frequency in hertz of the high pass filter Float number where 0 000001 S E 0 499999 Factory sampleRate default is 0 001 204 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 33 Input Filter page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Low Pass Order The order of the low pass filter Integer from 0 to 5 Factory default is 0 Low Pass Frequency Hz The 3dB corner frequency of the low pass filter Float number where 0 000001 lt 0 499999 Factory default is sampleRate 1 0 Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 8 3 2 Detectors The Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Triggers gt Detector n page provides options to set the detector for the corresponding channel Table H 34 Table H 34 Detector page options Parameter Widget Description STA Time constant s The short term time constant TC in seconds Float number where 1 2n TC 0 000001 lt lt 0 499999 Factory default is 1 sampleRate LTA Time constant s The long term time constant TC in seconds Float number where 1 2n TC 0 000001 lt lt 0 499999 Factory default is 5 sampleRate Trigger On Ratio The STA LTA at which a trigger is written to the Store Float number wher
255. r ground referenced single ended signals to 3 6V This is provided for use with sensors that have single ended outputs ref erenced to ground or where unusually high common mode signals must be rejected This mode consumes approximately 40mW additional power Either Low Power or High Power mode can be used with High Impedance mode for all input ranges except 40 V pp for which the Low Power setting is not applicable 8 1 2 3 Enable Dither Enable Dither adds a very small random signal to the input signal of the Digitizer at an amplitude low enough so the dynamic range of the Digitizer is not reduced to virtually eliminate so called idle tones Idle tones are a phenomenon which may occur only when the input is held to zero or pure DC so that the least significant bit of the Digi tizer output can flip around in a quasi periodic pattern Idle tones seen on Taurus even when dither is turned off have virtually no energy are not indicative of a malfunc 74 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing tion and are not present when recording real data Setting Enable Dither to enabled costs an approximate 10mW power 8 1 24 Software Gain You can set the Digitizer gain to attenuate or amplify the sensor input signal to a level that will optimize use of the Digitizer dynamic range After the Taurus digitizes the sig nal it multiplies the amplitude by the software gain va
256. rd drive Time series data are available for streaming to an external system if the Taurus is running in Communications mode 10 2 Data Stores The Store contains the time series state of health SOH and log data The data are organized into bands which are groups of data that may contain one or more chan nels Bands contain data packets in multiple data blocks with a default size of 1 MB The Store works as a ringbuffer It will wrap around when it is full and record over the oldest data that may be overwritten while preserving all data types That is the Taurus will select the oldest data block to overwrite as long as that is not the only data block for that band If it is the only data block for that band it will search for the next avail able data block to overwrite A single Store may encompass many files each being up to 1 GB in size This is trans parent when using the Store on the Taurus but is relevant if you are planning to copy a Store to your PC because you must copy all files for that Store if you want to extract data later on A single recording medium may contain multiple Stores although this is not recom mended see Section 10 2 1 1 on page 96 10 2 1 Create a Store Creating a Store is not a separate option The Taurus will either create a Store automat ically or will prompt you to create a Store The Taurus will create a Store automatically after formatting a new medium in the active media slot Sect
257. re 10 1 In this case you have these options Switch to the other medium if it is available You may then log in and Switch Media again at which time you can create a Store with a capacity from the list of available options Delete files from the small medium to free up sufficient space Format the small medium Formatting will destroy all data and partition informa tion on the medium Figure 10 1 Small Media example Y Y Eco Mode Communications Not enough free disk space Have 897MB but Store Channels 3 250 sps configured for 1000MB Store Hone Store Time Left Unknown Active Media NONE IP 199 71 138 54 Current Configuration Compact Flash Time 2008 04 24 19 26 42 IDE Available Yes Battery N A q Power N A CF Available Yes Temp NA Packets mna oo a Senso Power MEn No Data Available 10 2 1 1 About appended Stores If you insert media containing a Store previously created on the same Taurus the Store ID contains the Taurus serial number the Taurus will append data to the existing Store If there is more than one Store on the medium the Taurus will append to the Store identified by its own serial number if it exists Otherwise it will append to any one of the existing Stores 96 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 10 Recording Data If you insert media containing one or more Stores created on different Tauruses the curre
258. re 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 factory default is 9600 See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 2 5 Discovery The Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Discovery page provides options to set Taurus to broadcast its presence to other devices on the network that are running Apollo Table H 21 see also Section 7 5 on page 69 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 96 User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 21 Discovery page options Parameter Widget Description Enable Discovery Set Taurus to send out identification messages to other devices on the network that are running Apollo Options are enabled W not enabled Factory default is enabled IP Address A valid multicast IP address the first octet must be between 224 and 240 inclusive each of the last three octets can be any positive integer from 0 to 255 Factory default is 224 199 71 138 Port The port number to listen on for Discovery broadcasts from Taurus Factory default is 6776 Function buttons See Table H 12 on page 191 for a description of the Apply Commit Reset and Previous buttons H 13 3 Security The Advanced Configuration gt Security page provides two authentication options for logging in via the display Table H 22 You can access this page only if you are logged in as cent ral See also Chapter 6 Confi
259. red as Needs Power enabled V Detect Sensor Presence enabled Sensor On and it is consum ing power The sensor is configured as Needs Power not enabled and Sensor Off If there is a No Current error for a sensor that normally draws more than 8mA it probably means either that the sensor is not connected or the power manager has cut off power to the sen sor In the latter case the Status Page will show red for both the sensor status and for the power status 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide 1 79 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 1 Status page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Power manager status bar The power manager status bar indicates the status of external device current draw with a status colour and a text message Red status with text Power OverCurrent An external device on either the serial or the sensor connector has drawn too much cur rent and has been shut off Sensor power can be turned back on assuming the fault condition has been fixed in the Sensor page see Section H 9 Sensor on page 189 The Taurus must be power cycled to restore serial power once it has been tripped Green status with text Power Power usage of external devices is within tolerance Ethernet status bar The Ethernet status bar indicates the status of Ethernet networking with a status colour and a text message Some status condit
260. rent version cannot download more than 488 MB of data in Seisan format Use multiple downloads for quantities of data that exceed 488 MB Seisan downloads use a conversion tool that you install on your PC from the Taurus on the initial download see Section 11 1 3 3 Initial setup for extracting to Seisan format on page 108 Subsequent downloads to Seisan format will run the conversion automati cally 1f you choose Open it with the default application or equivalent in the browser download window Save will save the file with the extension ms2seisan you can run the conversion program on this file for exam ple double click on the file e ASCII 6 Review the settings you have chosen and either download using these settings or change the settings gt Click Download to save the data to a file using the current settings For MiniSEED and ASCII formats save the file to your PC For Seisan open the file This will run the conversion program and save the file to a Seisan REA subdirectory for that station for example C Seismo REA STNO1 2005 10 gt To change the settings click the link to return to the appropriate settings page change the settings then click Next to proceed through the settings pages to the Download page For time series data settings pages and the corresponding links include Change Data Type Choose a different data type to download Change Channel Choose one or more time serie
261. ring attempt Yellow and Red thresholds respectively and set the number of retries and retry intervals to achieve centred masses You must have a control line configured for Mass Center and have at least one of these thresholds enabled Auto Center on Yellow The Taurus will initiate mass centring when any axis has been above the Yellow Threshold for more than the Yellow Holdoff Time If all axes drop below the Yellow threshold during holdoff time then the holdoff time is cancelled Auto Center on Red The Taurus will initiate mass centring 1 minute after any axis exceeds the Red Threshold Each mass centring attempt is comprised of the configured number of retries at the con figured retry interval That is retries will be attempted until all axes are below the Yel low threshold or until the number of Retries per Auto Center have been executed 9 2 Sensor configuration Sensor configuration options are in the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details pages Figure 9 2 You can edit add and delete sensor configurations manually Section 9 2 1 You can upload predefined sensor configurations using options in the Advanced Configuration page and you can create new sensor configuration files by copying and editing existing files Section 9 2 2 on page 90 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 85 User Guide Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Figure 9 2 Sensor configuration pages
262. rious configuration sub pages and options to manage the configuration Table H 12 Availability of pages depends on the level of user access see Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access All of the General Communications Security Playback Timing Calibration Sensor Details Digitizer and Power configuration pages are accessible if you are logged in as cent ral All configuration pages except the Security page are accessible if you are logged in as tech No configuration pages are available if you are logged in as user user access does allow access to the Store Tools options Table H 12 Advanced Configuration page options Parameter Widget Description Hyperlinks Save all changes in a temporary cache and open the linked configuration page Previous Save all changes in a temporary cache and open the configuration page that is at the previous level in the hierarchy Ina browser always use the Previous button not the browser s Back button to preserve unapplied changes when navigating back through configuration pages 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 91 User Guide Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 12 Advanced Configuration page options Continued Parameter Widget Description Apply Apply all changes that have accumulated in the temporary cache for example if you have applied changes from several configuration pages Nothing is applied if an invali
263. rogram or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for soft ware interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Sub section b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to 1t For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition
264. rol ler has shut down and the MediaLED is green After you have closed the media door the Controller will boot automatically 2 Log in and go to the Store Tools page gt If you want to reformat the currently active medium first choose Switch Media 3 Click Format MediaType You will be prompted for confirmation To exit the page without formatting the medium either click the Store Tools Menu button or choose another page from the main menu 4 To format the medium click Proceed If you choose Switch Media after formatting is completed Section 10 3 3 you will be prompted to choose the new Store capacity from the list of available options 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 03 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 10 Recording Data 10 3 3 Switch recording to the other medium If you have media installed in both slots you have the option to switch to the inactive medium if it is already formatted Note Switch Media will commit the new Store configuration size media type and will also commit any other applied changes made in the Configuration or Advanced Configuration pages 1 Log in and go to the Store Tools page 2 Click Switch Media To exit the page without switching to the inactive medium either click the Store Tools Menu button or choose another page from the main menu There will be two options depending on whether there is a Store on the medium e If there is no Store on the formatted i
265. row 3 5 Accessing the Taurus from a remote browser You can access the Taurus from a browser over an IP connection The Taurus must be in either Communications mode or Interactive mode and the network cable must be connected before the Taurus is powered See also Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Com munications 1 Connect to the Taurus using any of these methods gt Use the Ethernet cable 15228 to connect the Taurus to your LAN or to con nect your computer directly to the Taurus 22 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus Connect to the Taurus via a serial SLIP or PPP connection 2 Power up the Taurus 3 If you do not know the IP address of the Taurus start the display The IP address of the unit is shown on the Status page 4 Open a browser and go to a Taurus URL For example the Status page is http TaurusIPAddress 3 5 1 Using the web interface over slow links The Taurus web interface normally refreshes every 5 seconds Taurus will detect if a communications link is slow and will reduce the interface refresh rate to attempt to compensate for the link speed 3 6 Navigating the Taurus Ul pages The Taurus UI web pages show real time status information and provide configura tion data download and firmware upgrade options You can use the UI pages via the Taurus display and keypad and on any web browser with IP access to the Tauru
266. rs to detailed availability information for each channel band of data Text summaries are available for both time series and the other data types such as SOH H 6 1 Month H 6 2 Week H 6 3 Day H 6 4 Text The Data Availability gt Month page shows a calendar view summary of time series data availability for the selected 6 week period The graphical links at the top of the page E sut sep 2005 S scroll the calendar view in 2 week increments back or forward The graphical link for each week opens the selected Week view Any day for which there are data gaps have a link to the graphical summary for that day The default view shows the current or most recently selected week at the bottom of the cal endar A legend for the colour coding for Percent Data Available is shown at the bot tom of the page The Refresh link updates the page The Data Availability gt Week page shows a graphical summary of the time series data availability for each channel for the selected week The graphical links at the top of the page E weexsrorzw0w5s E open the previous and next Week pages The date links open the graphical summary for that day It defaults to either the current or the most recently selected week or the last week on the Month calendar view depending on your previous selections The Refresh link updates the page The Data Availability gt Day page shows a graphical summary of the time series data availability for each channel for the
267. ry default is 1 Amplitude Set the calibration signal amplitude in the appropriate Calibration Mode units volts or amperes Float number Factory default is 0 1 The Cali bration page will accept calibration signal amplitudes up to 5 0V or 60mA depending on the Calibration Mode VOLTAGE or CURRENT If taken as a single ended output for example between pin N SEN CAL 1 4 and pin V DGND the calibration circuit can provide a signal with a maximum ampli tude of 4 5 V Ensure that you choose a value low enough that the signal will not clip If you have configured calibration for voltage mode ensure that you know the cali bration coil resistance 92 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Wait Time The length of time in seconds after the calibration coil has been enabled before sending the calibration signal Options are 0 15 30 60 120 300 600 1200 Factory default is 0 Ramp Duration The length of time in seconds to bring the signal amplitude up to the configured amplitude and then down from the configured amplitude Typically only Sine calibrations are ramped Options are 0 10 30 60 120 600 1800 3600 Factory default is 0 Duration The length of time in seconds to generate the calibration signal at the configured amplitude between ramps Options are 10 60 300 600 1800 3600 7200 18000 36000 72000 Factory default is 6
268. s See Appendix H for a summary of the UI pages and options You must have cookies ena bled in your browser 3 6 1 Choose a main page Main pages are available from the drop down menu in the title bar Some main pages have hyperlinked sub pages From any page on the Taurus UI you can choose a main page from the menu gt In a browser click to open the menu and then click to choose the highlighted page Figure 3 3 You can bookmark the page http TaurusIPAddress pages taurus pagename page gt In the display the menu is active when the text is white on a blue background Press the centre key to open the menu and use the top or bottom key to scroll through the list of main pages Press the centre key to open the highlighted page Do not use the main menu or Taurus icon if you want to preserve changes in the Advanced Configuration sub pages and the Data Retrieval pages If you want to pre serve changes use the page navigation options as described in Section 3 6 3 Figure 3 3 Taurus main menu 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 23 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus 3 6 2 Browser navigation gt Ona browser you can use the Back and Forward buttons to navigate unless there are changes that you want to preserve Navigating with the browser buttons will discard any unapplied changes in the Advanced Configuration sub pages and any changes in the Data Retrieval pages If you want to preser
269. s media write status Colour display 240 320 colour graphics LCD display with backlight 3 5 diagonal Input device 5 key navigation control for web interface A 10 Software Operating system Embedded Linux Applications software Nanometrics Apollo acquisition server with web interface 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 25 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix A Specifications A 11 Connectors This section lists Taurus connector receptacle specifications and indicates appropriate mating plugs See Appendix B for connector diagrams and pinout descriptions Sensor 26 socket shell size 16 MIL C 26482 Series 1 Mating connector MS3116J16 26P GPS TNC female Mating connector TNC male Power 3 pin shell size 8 MIL C 26482 Series 1 Mating connector MS3116J8 3S USB Serial 19 socket shell size 14 insert position W MIL C 26482 Series 1 Mating connector MS3116J14 19PW Ethernet 4 socket shell size 8 insert position W MIL C 26482 Series 1 Mating connector MS3116J8 4PW SOH 7 socket shell size 10 MIL C 26482 Series 1 Mating connector MS3116J10 7P NMXbus 4 pin shell size 8 MIL C 26482 Series 1 Mating connector MS3116J8 4S USB Mini USB Type AB socket Mating connector mini USB Type A or Type B plug A 12 Ports Ethernet 10 100Base T port for remote configuration and IP packet forwarding Serial Serial Port 1 Rx Tx RTS CTS DTR DSR CD RI Serial Port 2 Rx Tx
270. s are 10 20 40 50 80 100 120 200 250 500 500sps is not supported in Buffered mode Factory default is 100 Note that valid value ranges for some of the trigger parameters depend on the sample rate therefore some sample rates may be incompatible with your cur rent trigger settings See also Section 8 1 3 Triggers settings on page 75 Table H 33 Input Filter page options on page 204 and Table H 34 Detector page options on page 205 Output Channels The number of output channels Choose an option from the Output Channels drop down list Options are 0 1 2 3 Factory default is 3 If you choose O channels no time series data are written to the Store Enable DC Removal Set whether the DC removal filter is used on data This enables a high pass filter with a configurable low corner frequency Options are enabled W not enabled Factory default is not enabled DC Removal Cutoff The DC Removal cutoff refers to the corner frequency of the high pass filter in hertz used in the Enable DC Removal parameter All sig nal frequencies below this are removed Enter a number between 0 001 and 1 0 Factory default is 0 001 Frames Per Packet The number of standard SEED frames per packet for transmission of time series data Options are 3 7 Factory default is 7 Sample Alignment Sample alignment after a time error correction see also Section 8 2 2 System time correction on page 80 Choose an option
271. s channels Change Time Choose a different start date time and duration You can see available times under Show Available Times Change Format Choose ASCII Seisan or MiniSEED format for the downloaded data Change Station Info Edit station information that will be used in the downloaded data file headers You can change Network Name Station Name and Channel Names 1 1 0 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 11 Accessing Data gt Use Clear All Choices if you want to deselect all of the current settings delimit ing the data and return to the Data Retrieval main page 11 2 2 Extract seismic data to a file by event from an event list You can retrieve seismic data from a Taurus using information from an event list This procedure describes data extraction using the Data Retrieval Time Series By Event page options The event list may be a file that you upload to the Taurus for example a list of events from third party Internet sites or information for a single event that you enter into a form The Taurus calculates arrival times for various phases that are applicable to the event selected Supported phases include P S Pn Sn PKiKP SKiKS PcP ScS PKP SKS Pdiff and Sdiff Travel time tables are used to calculate the estimated time it takes a seismic wave to travel distance from a seismic event to a specified location This is used to determine what data to download for
272. s data from a Store either from the Taurus directly or from removed media by extracting it to a file in MiniSEED Seisan or ASCII format You can also stream time series data from the Taurus to a central acquisition server for example to write the data to NAQS ringbuffers Note Trigger information is available as an SOH download Section 11 3 1 1 on page 118 11 2 1 Extract time series data to a file You can extract time series data from a Store to various formats This procedure describes data extraction using the Data Retrieval gt Time Series page options 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 09 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 11 Accessing Data 1 On a browser over an IP connection choose Data Retrieval from the menu 2 Choose Time Series then click Next Available channels are listed with the data time ranges 3 Click to select one or more channels then click Next This opens a page with options to select the start date and time and duration of the data to download 4 Set the time parameters then click Next This opens a page with options to select the data format 5 You can extract the data to a file in any of 3 formats MiniSEED The extracted file uses a 512 byte Data Record Length The current version cannot download more than 488 MB of data in Mini SEED format Use multiple downloads for quantities of data that exceed 488MB e Seisan Extracted files have been tested with Seisan 8 0 The cur
273. s you commit them Reset will clear all changes that have not yet been applied Reset has no effect once you have clicked either Apply or Commit Apply Commit and Reset work independently of the current Ul page you are on They always affect the entire configuration the entire configuration is the collection of all Taurus parameters which you can modify For example if you make a change in one configuration page go to another page and make a sec ond change and then click Reset both changes are cleared from volatile mem ory Some configuration changes require a Restart before they take effect for example changes to Communications and Security settings The UI will pro vide a message when this is the case instructing you that a commit followed by a restart is required In these cases you cannot use Apply to test the changes before committing them Previous returns you to a configuration page one up in the hierarchy without losing unapplied changes gt When using a browser always use the Previous button not the browser s Back button to preserve unapplied changes when navigating back through configuration pages 2 3 2 Basic configuration settings There are some basic settings you may want to check before proceeding to other con figuration changes gt You can make all of the configuration changes then do a single Apply and Com mit 2 3 2 1 Running mode There are two basic running modes Buffered and Communicati
274. se a different start date time and duration The initial time is set automatically on the Change Time By Phase page You can see available times under Show Available Times Change Time By Phase Choose a start time and duration automatically using the available phase data uploaded with the event Change Format Choose ASCII Seisan or MiniSEED format for the downloaded data Change Station Info Edit station information that will be used in the downloaded data file headers You can change Network Name Station Name and Channel Names Change Event Choose a different event from the event list The page may take a minute to load if there is a large list of events gt Use Clear All Choices if you want to deselect all of the current settings delimit ing the data and return to the Data Retrieval main page This will also delete the currently uploaded event file and event list 11 2 3 Stream time series data to a central acquisition server You can stream time series data from a Taurus to a central acquisition server for exam ple to write the data to NAQS ringbuffers To stream Taurus data to NAQS the NpToNmxp utility must be running on the NAQS server Note If you have restarted NpToNmxp and you wish to ensure timely start of data packets from a Taurus running firmware version 2 x then disable and enable streaming in the Taurus In the Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Data Streaming page disable Stream NP Pa
275. showing the status of the system clock GPS satellites and a GPS satellites map You can download timing SOH information as csv files see Section H 7 Data Retrieval on page 183 and Section 11 3 1 Extract State of Health data to a csv file on page 116 There is a corresponding Timing status bar on the Status page see the relevant entry in Table H 1 Status page options on page 177 GPS and timing configuration options are in the Advanced Configuration gt Timing page Section H 13 5 on page 198 H 8 1 Timing The Timing page shows information about the system clock and GPS receiver status Table H 6 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 87 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters Table H 6 Timing status page options Parameter group Parameter Description System Clock System System time see Table 8 1 Taurus time definitions on Time page 79 PLL State Phase lock to GPS Uncertainty Uncertainty of System Time Time Error The amount of time by which System Time differs from GPS Time see also Table 8 1 Taurus time definitions on page 79 DAC Count The value used to calculate the time base Read only GPS Engine State The current activity of the GPS receiver for example searching for usable satellites Satellites The number of usable satellites PDOP Position dilution of precision A standard estimate of the GPS position precisio
276. st Store configuration settings see also Section 10 2 1 on page 95 1 00 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 10 Recording Data 10 3 2 Format recording media 10 3 2 1 Formatting is not necessary for media shipped from Nanometrics these are preformat ted to Linux Ext3 You can use the Taurus to format media from a different filesystem format to Ext3 and to reformat used media that are already formatted to Ext3 Which procedure you can use depends on whether one or both media types are inserted in the Taurus which medium is the active one and whether the media are already formatted to Ext3 Table 10 1 The active medium is the one the Taurus is currently configured to use for recording data Formatting will destroy all existing data and partition information on the medium The Taurus will create two directories on the medium immediately after completing the for matting mnt mediaType logs and mnt mediaType store Table 10 1 Media formatting options Media installed Options for formatting media on the Taurus One formatted You cannot format the active medium if it is already formatted active medium Optionally delete the active Store and create a new one if you want to reuse the medium see Section 10 2 on page 98 One formatted You can format the inactive medium whether or not it is already inactive medium formatted Two formatted You can format the inactive med
277. struments will result in a ground loop When the digitizer and sensor are far apart differences in ground potential will cause spurious signals to appear unless the loop is broken The solution is therefore to either earth the digitizer case and isolate the sensor case or vice versa Usually the simplest solution is to earth the digitizer as shown in Figure C 1 and Figure C 2 A hole pre drilled for an M4 x 5 screw is provided on the side of the Taurus case for this purpose Figure 4 2 on page 36 Trillium has stainless steel adjustable feet which when mounted directly onto dry rock or concrete provide a high resistance to ground In wet environments it may be necessary to mount the sensor on a plate of glass embedded in sand or to choose to earth the sensor and isolate the digitizer case Some sensors may have no chassis connection at the connector In this case the sensor and digitizer must be separately earthed In the wiring lists in this Appendix P1 is the sensor connector and P2 is the digitizer connector The run and colour columns are used to indicate which signals are paired together and how the shields are connected In particular drain means the drain wire of the shield of the twisted pair indicated in the run column and braid means the overall braided shield of the cable 1 38 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconnection C 3 2 Passive sensors
278. t is you must run the batch or script file before you can navigate to Apollo Light in your web browser 1 Open a command window and start Apollo Light from the apollo directory gt On Windows enter apollo port value gt On Linux Unix enter apollo port value where the default is port 80 Use the optional parameter to indicate an alterna tive port greater than 1024 for example 8080 in either of these cases If there is a web server running on the machine port 80 will already be in use 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 63 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix F Apollo Light Utility On Linux Unix root login may be required to run the web server at the default port port 80 Example 1 apollo Example 2 apollo port 8080 2 Open a web browser and go to the root page of the machine on which Apollo is running for example http localhost If the port is a value other than the default you must include the port number for example http localhost 8080 F 2 1 Initialize the Store location The first time you start Apollo Light from a new installation or if the last used Store directory has been deleted the command window will indicate Got error while open ing store followed by java exceptions as shown example on Windows gt Got error while opening store ca nanometrics store excep tion StoreException Directory C nmx store does not exist amp at ca nanometrics store
279. ta Type Channels none Change Channel Start Time none End Time none unde Data Format none Change Format z Network JH 5 E tatin Change station Into Station Info Station STNO1 Change Station Info Clear All Choices 11 1 3 2 Confirm Playback settings Ensure that the network station and channel information is correct for the data you want to extract Playback information is used in extracted time series data file head ings and in the default file names for all types of extracted data You can change the Playback information temporarily for the current data retrieval ses sion or change the default for all downloads as a change to the Taurus configuration 11 1 3 2 1 Change the Playback settings for the current data extraction Ina data retrieval page click the Current Choices Change Station Info link and edit the settings for downloads in the current session Figure 11 4 Click Next Figure 11 3 Edit Station Info for the current download session Data Retrieval P Station Information Hetwork Hame f 2400105 Station Hame 5 Tot Channel Names taurus_0105 band timeSeries1 HZ taurus 0105 banditimeSeries2 BHN taurus 0105 banditimeSeries3 BHE Current Choicec 11 1 3 2 2 Change the Playback configuration for the Taurus 1 Log in as tech or cent ral 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 07 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 11 Accessing Data 2 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Playback page Fi
280. tart Shutdown Restart 8 2 Configuring Taurus timing The Taurus provides options for setting the GPS receiver duty cycle for system clock corrections and to set a requirement for GPS lock on startup before digitizing Figure 8 3 78 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing Figure 8 3 Timing configuration page Blvd Advanced Configuration Y Timing GPS Duty Cycle Mode Automatic iv Correction Mode Gradual Drift v Digitizing Needs GPS Lock The Taurus derives its time frames from GPS time as described in Table 8 1 The times shown on the various pages are updated whenever those page views refresh typically every 5 seconds unless the refresh rate is reduced to compensate for a slow network link when using a browser Table 8 1 Taurus time definitions Type Description Shown on Taurus UI GPS Time The GPS time provided by the GPS receiver Not shown used as the The Taurus has an algorithm that attempts to basis for the derived times correct any time errors that the GPS receiver described below may have under certain conditions System Time The current time according to the Taurus Timing tab Timing page Digitizer subsystem System Time is System Time resynchronized to GPS Time when the GPS receiver is turned on The timing module is sometimes referred to as the System Clock Controller The current time ac
281. te of Health data to a csv file on page 116 Options are enabled not enabled Sensitivity Units Refer to your sensor manual for the appropriate value Options are V m s V m s s Sensitivity Value Refer to your sensor manual for this value Click the Sensor Control Lines link and configure the settings as appropriate for the sensor factory defaults are for the Trillium 40 Assert On Level Assert line level HIGH_Z ZERO POSITIVE Deassert Off Level Deassert line level HIGH_Z ZERO POSITIVE Positive Voltage Level Positive voltage level PLUS_5 PLUS_12 Pulse Duration s Control pulse duration in seconds 1 3 5 7 10 15 20 Ctrl Line n Options for control line functionality include Unused Assert Unused Deassert Ch 1 Cal Enable Ch 2 Cal Enable Ch 3 Cal Enable SP LP On SP SP LP On LP XYZ UVW On XYZ XYZ UVW On UVW Mass Center Mass Lock Mass Unlock If you have configured calibration for current mode Calibration Mode on the Sensor Details page control lines 4 5 and 6 will not be available for any other configuration option They will be reserved for calibration current return Optionally configure mass auto centring Section 9 1 2 2 on page 85 On the Sen sor Details page click the Mass Auto Center link Choose settings as appropriate to your application Red Threshold V The minimum mass position voltage level to indicate that the mass position
282. ter 4 Powering the Taurus 4 3 2 Power up the Taurus 1 Connect the Taurus to an appropriate power supply The Taurus will start booting up in the currently configured running mode either Buffered or Communications mode Communications mode is the shipping default It will take the Taurus a minute or two to boot While the unit is booting the display will be off and the SuperLEDs and Ether LED will indicate status see Section 3 8 2 Status LEDs on page 26 2 If you want to start the display once the Taurus has finished booting press the cen tre key on the keypad for about 1 second It may take a minute for the display to start Note If the Store is reindexing while the Taurus is in Buffered mode the Taurus will not respond to a key press until the reindexing is complete In this case you will see a yellow SuperLED and the display may take a very long time to start up after you press the centre key This should be a very rare scenario 4 3 3 Specialized power up procedures There are two modified power up procedures for specific purposes 4 3 3 1 Power up the Taurus in factory test mode When upgrading from version 1 x firmware to version 2 x or higher you must start the Taurus in factory test mode 1 Shut down the Taurus Go to the Shutdown page and click Shutdown 2 Once the LED below the Ethernet connector is off disconnect the power cable 3 Press and hold the centre key down while you connect the power ca
283. the Digitizer While the Controller is running you have access to the Taurus over an IP connection and applied configuration changes are held in volatile memory Once the Controller shuts down you no longer have IP access to the Taurus and any uncommitted changes in the volatile memory for Controller based functions will be lost The Taurus Digitizer runs as long as the Taurus has power connected Therefore there is a practical distinction between references to running the Controller which may be running or not depending on the configuration and powering the Taurus which depends only on whether power is connected continuously 3 3 Starting up and shutting down the Taurus This section lists procedures for starting up and shutting down the Taurus 3 3 1 Start the Taurus The Taurus Digitizer Controller and timing are started up as soon as you connect power to the Taurus Typically it takes about 3 minutes for these Taurus systems to fin ish booting when power is first connected About 2 minutes after connecting power to the Taurus you can start the display press and hold the centre key for 1 second the display will start in about 10 to 15 seconds You may see the initial splash screen indi cating boot progress Figure 3 1 If the supply voltage exceeds either of the configured voltage disconnect settings that is it is either lower than the Battery Low value or higher than the Battery High level the Taurus will not power up S
284. the Taurus is operating at an installation Store status bar The Store status bar indicates the status of the Store and the active recording medium with a status colour and a text message and provides a link to the Store Tools page Red with various messages indicating that a Store is not available for example during reindexing or if no media are installed Green indicates data are being recorded to the currently active Store Sensor power status bar The sensor power status bar indicates the sensor power status with a status colour and a text message and provides a link to the Sensor page Sensor configuration options are on the Advanced Configuration Sensor Details page and control options are on the Sensor page It uses these inputs Advanced Configuration Sensor Details Needs Power Advanced Configuration Sensor Details Detect Sensor Pres ence Sensor Sensor On Off Colour Text Indicates Red SensorNo The sensor is configured as Needs Power Power enabled Y and Sensor Off Sensor The sensor is configured as Needs Power Powered not enabled and Sensor On SensorNo The sensor is configured as Needs Power Current enabled v Detect Sensor Presence enabled Sensor On but it is not consuming any power Detect sensor presence works only for sensors drawing more than about 8mA Green Sensor Either of these conditions Power The sensor is configu
285. the configuration back to Standard which will disable Quick Login access on the display Figure 6 2 Configure Quick Login Security Security Local Authentication Quick Login y Local Authentication quick Login y Login Account Login Account user v gt Quick Login revu Lr ram M Advanced Configuration Y eset 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 49 User Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access 6 1 2 Logging off of the Taurus If you are currently logged in to the Taurus the page option in the main menu is Log Off You will be prompted for confirmation before you are logged off gt To exit this page without logging off choose any other page option from the main menu You can continue working in the current session A session will log off automatically when you close the browser for a browser session or when the display shuts down for a session on the Taurus display 6 1 3 Changing passwords 1 Log off if you are currently logged in as the Change Password page is available from the Log In page 2 Open the Log In page and click the Change Password page link 3 Type in the current user ID and password then type in the new password It must be at least 4 alphanumeric characters long It is case sensitive 4 Type the new password in the Verify New Password field 5 If you want to clear all current field entries for example to enter different values c
286. the program to open it with as storeDataTo Seisan bat or storeDataToSeisan sh depending on platform gt If running under Linux Unix you will have to use chmod to change the per missions of the sh file to make it executable Subsequent downloads to Seisan format will run the conversion automatically if you choose Open it with the default application or equivalent in the browser download window Save will save the file with the extension ms2seisan you can run the conversion program on this file for example double click on the file The conversion logs are written to the file StoreDataToSeisan yyyymmdd log in C nmx user or nmx user depending on platform 1 08 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 11 Accessing Data 11 1 4 Accessing Store files on the recording media with your PC The Taurus media are formatted to use the Linux Ext3 file system You can copy the files to your PC from the Taurus via a means such as FTP You can access and copy the files on removed media with a media reader such as a Nanometrics Hard Drive Reader or a third party CompactFlash reader gt All of the Store files must be present in the same directory if you want to view or extract data For example on the Taurus media in a media reader connected to your PC or copied to a directory on your PC If you want to extract data from a copied Store or from a Store on removed media use Apollo Light see Appe
287. time errors may develop if the System Clock is left free running without the GPS receiver active for a prolonged period of time The magnitude of the error is dependent on the length of time the GPS was unlocked or otherwise unavailable and the stability of the ambient temperature of the Taurus In these cases the clock steering described above would take too long and a Time Error Reset is necessary This eliminates a large part of the error instantly after which the error can be driven small using the steering mechanism The Time Error Reset introduces a discontinuity in the Taurus time frame because time appears to be jumping by a predefined amount 8 2 2 1 Time error reset options There are two modes for configuring how the Taurus will execute the Time Error Reset Gradual Drift and No Alignment When Gradual Drift is selected only time errors that are larger than 6 67ms are eliminated by a time jump that is a multiple of 10ms After the reset the remaining time error is eliminated by the steering mechanism described above This may take a while hence the name Gradual Drift When No Alignment is selected time errors as small as 66 6us are corrected by the Time Error Reset with a size of a multiple of 100us The advantage of this is that the amount of error left for gradual steering is small and Fine Lock is achieved sooner The disadvantage is that the time jump may cause the digitized samples to fall out of UTC alignment and re
288. ting the respec tive slot proportions to 90 and 10 1 Log in and go to the Advanced Configuration Communications page Figure 7 4 2 Ensure the Taurus is configured for a SLIP connection see Section 7 3 4 1 on page 57 for the procedure to configure Taurus for SLIP 3 Go to the Advanced Configuration gt Communications gt Serial Port 1 gt TDMA page 4 Set Enable TDMA to enabled v and set the TDMA parameter values as appropri ate for your application e Frame Length ms Set the TDMA frame length in milliseconds The frame length must be set to the same value for all devices sharing the link for exam ple for each Janus Port n Taurus pair This value should be compatible with the minimum slot size for this connection Section 7 3 5 1 1 Enter a number from 1000 to 10000 Factory default is 4000 Slot Start 70 Set the Taurus TDMA slot start position as a percentage of the entire frame This value should be compatible with the corresponding Janus port setting Slot Start plus Slot Duration must be less than or equal to 100 Enter a number from 0 to 99 Factory default is 0 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 61 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications 7 3 5 1 1 e Slot Duration Set the Taurus TDMA slot duration as a percentage of the entire frame This value should be compatible with the corresponding Janus port setting and the minimum slot size limit for this
289. tion of configuration param eters and permitted values on each configuration page See also the specific configura tion procedures in the appropriate chapters 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 43 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 5 Changing a Taurus Configuration See Table H 12 Advanced Configuration page options for a description of configu ration page controls hyperlinks and the Apply Commit Reset Previous Browse Upload and Download buttons 5 3 Configuration audit trail Taurus maintains an audit trail of all configuration changes since the Store was created You can download this information to a text file see Section 11 3 3 on page 119 You can view the text file to determine the exact state of the configuration for the Taurus at any point since the Store was created It contains the configuration data and metadata and an audit trail event trigger The audit trail event triggers that create an entry are The Store is opened which includes Taurus start up Any change that is applied to the configuration The configuration is committed 5 4 Changing the configuration g The configuration parameters have default values as indicated in the relevant tables in Appendix H UI Pages and Parameters You will likely need to change some of these values for your system Basic options are in the Configuration page all options are in the Advanced Configuration pages The Apply Reset and Commit functio
290. tions Parameter Widget Description Browse This option is only available from a browser Browse your file system for a Taurus upgrade file taurus release x tgz Upload This option is only available from a browser Transfer the selected taurus release x tgz to the Taurus Install Install the selected Taurus version and run it in test mode Delete Delete the installation files for the selected Taurus version Commit Set the currently running firmware as default Revert Reboot the Taurus and run the default version of the firmware Active Version A read only indicator of the currently running version of the firmware Default Version A read only indicator of the default version of the firmware Taurus Portable Seismograph 206 User Guide 15148R5 2007 02 09 Appendix H Ul Pages and Parameters H 15 Log In Log Off The Log In Log Off pages provide options for you to log in to the Taurus with different levels of user access and to change passwords Table H 37 and Table H 38 See also Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access Table H 37 Log In page options Parameter Widget Description Userld User account to log in under Options are user tech central Password The password for the specified UserlD Factory defaults are user tech and central Log In as account Log in using the display without having to enter the Password but choose the correct UserID from the dr
291. tions and procedures for properly powering and shutting down the Taurus and for setting power manager parameters Chapter 5 Changing a Taurus Configuration An overview of how to work with the Taurus configuration and procedures for changing a configuration Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access An overview of user access mod els and procedures for logging in to the Taurus Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications Procedures for configuring the Taurus for Ethernet or serial networking Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing Overview information and procedures for configuring the Digitizer and system timing Chapter 9 Controlling and Configuring Sensors Procedures for sending com mands to a sensor and for configuring the Taurus to work with sensors either by manually editing settings or by uploading predefined configurations Chapter 10 Recording Data Overview information and procedures for working with the recording media IDE hard drive or CompactFlash card and with Taurus data Stores Chapter 11 Accessing Data Overview information and procedures for extract ing data from Taurus Stores and for streaming data to a central server Part 3 Appendices contain reference information Appendix A Specifications Taurus specifications Appendix B Connector Pinouts Connector pinouts diagrams and descriptions Appendix C Sensor Digitizer Interconn
292. to 20 Factory default is 1 If you are using both the Red and the Yellow thresholds ensure that you set the Yellow threshold as the lower mass position limit and the Red threshold as the higher mass position limit Red gt Yellow To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a UI message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 9 2 1 2 Add a new sensor configuration You can save up to four sensor configurations on the Taurus If you add them manually in general it is easier to use the Sensor Details page rather than the Add button on either of the sub pages as the sub pages do not provide the option to edit the sensor name 1 Log in as tech or central and go to the Advanced Configuration gt Sensor Details page Click Add This will create a new entry in the list and will create a temporary label using an existing sensor configuration New gt Existing Name Figure 9 3 3 Type a name for the sensor in the Sensor Name box to replace the temporary label Edit the configuration values for the new sensor configuration as appropriate see Section 9 2 1 1 Edit an existing sensor configuration If you want to clear all changes at this point click Reset To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 88
293. tore the available time range of data the number of gaps includes both data gaps and time tears and a list of all gaps that exceed the gap tolerance with the number of packets missing 1f that information is available and the gap duration You can select a gap tolerance for this band from the Gap Tolerance drop down list options are Smin 1 min 30s 1s 500ms none The Refresh link updates the page and the All Channels link opens the main Time Series page H 6 4 2 Other H 6 4 2 1 Other data types include alert config log apollo DSP ARM SOH ARM control ler and triggers The Data Availability Text Other page provides a text summary of the available time ranges of data for each band of data the number of data gaps and time tears and the quantity of data as both units of time and as the percentage of space used in the Store The band name links to a page showing details about all gaps for that band The Refresh link updates the page Other band Each Data Availability Text Other band page shows details about availability for that band The page shows the quantity of data as the percentage of space used in the Store the available time range of data the number of gaps includes both data gaps and time tears and a list of all gaps that exceed the gap tolerance with the number of pack ets missing if that information is available and the gap duration You can select a gap tolerance for this band from the G
294. tore to various standard formats using the data retrieval options Data can be extracted over an IP connection from the Taurus With the Apollo Light utility you can extract data from a Store copied to your PC or directly off media inserted in a media reader Time series data may also be streamed to an acquisition server while the Taurus is in Communications mode One data retrieval request can be run at a time Any subsequent retrieval requests will be processed when the current download is finished You can run a data retrieval request concurrent with data streaming to an acquisition server 11 1 1 Viewing data in near real time If the Taurus is in Communications or Interactive mode you can view time series waveforms and some SOH information in near real time The lag is the page refresh rate usually 5s plus the Post Data Interval factory default 2s Viewing waveforms Waveforms in near real time are shown on the Status page Waveform page and Sensor page You can select waveform scaling options on the Waveform and Sensor pages see Table H 2 on page 180 for a description On the Waveform page only the scaling presently in use is shown on the upper right of the waveform After about 1 minute from startup of the Controller or following a change in the sample rate the wave form will show AC RMS and DC average On a single waveform display the min imum and maximum values of the visible data are also shown as a numeric value e
295. treaming over a serial link 56 Limitations iia naa iia pL Sane Gee Hee Saas eee ae Ie om tus 56 Configuring a SLIP direct connection liliis lle 57 Taurus configuration for SLIP connection 0 000 eee 57 Windows XP configuration for SLIP connection oooccccooccoc oo 58 Using GSEIP zu o eh PERS eds E eae a Re Gi CERRO ew IRE t nds 59 Taurus configuration for CSLIP connection liliis 60 Windows XP configuration for CSLIP cONNecti0N ooocoococcooooo 60 Configuring TDMA over SLIP 0 0 00 cect rh 60 Taurus configuration for TDMA 0 0 0 00 c eee 61 Mirimum slot SIZ vecina as rr a Weide C EUR SURE EE 62 Configuring a PPP dial in connection via dial up modem 00000 00 62 Taurus configuration for PPP dial in 2 0 0 es 63 Windows XP configuration for Taurus PPP dial in connecti0N 64 Viewing modem logs on Windows XP 0 000 eee eee 65 Viewing modem logs on Linux llis RII 65 Configuring a PPP direct cable connection 0 000 eee eee ees 66 Taurus configuration for PPP direct connection 020000e eee 66 Windows XP configuration for Taurus PPP direct connection 67 Data Streaming xxr ead cnc va PER REI exe a a E Pew 68 DISCO IP 69 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing llli 71 Configuring the Digitizer 2 Ie 71 Main Settings uere cR ERE LI age heath IET RES
296. tz of the high pass filter Factory default is 0 001 Low Pass Order The order of the low pass filter Factory default is 0 Low Pass Frequency Hz The 3dB corner frequency in hertz of the low pass filter Factory default is 1 0 3 To test the changes click Apply To make the changes permanent click Commit If so indicated by a Ul message activate the new configuration with a restart Shutdown Restart 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 77 2007 02 09 User Guide Chapter 8 Configuring the Digitizer and Timing 8 1 3 2 Detector algorithm parameters See Table H 34 Detector page options on page 205 for parameter value ranges 1 Log in as tech or central 2 Inthe Advanced Configuration gt Digitizer gt Triggers gt Detector n page choose detector algorithm parameters as appropriate to your application STA Time constant s The short term time constant in seconds In general choose a value longer than a few periods of a typical expected seismic signal of interest shorter than expected durations of events of interest and not so short that excessive false triggers are generated by non seismic noise spikes near the site Factory default is 1 second LTA Time constant s The long term time constant in seconds In general choose a value long enough to encompass at least several cycles of typical non seismic irregular noise for the site Factory default is 5 seconds Trigger On
297. u can retrieve from the Taurus or a Store Data that you can extract from the Store includes SOH system logs and configuration history You can download additional informa tion from the Taurus including system profile information and the current configura tion 11 3 1 Extract State of Health data to a csv file You can extract various types of SOH data from a Store to csv files This procedure describes data extraction using the Data Retrieval page options Predefined sets of SOH data are provided in the drop down list on the SOH Data page Table 11 1 on page 117 Using the predefined SOH options rather than User Selected individual columns is the preferred method for those applicable SOH as the predefined options in the list extract the relevant columns in context for example GPSTime parameters associated with Last update time If you want to download an individual SOH data column for example media door status use the procedure as for Trigger data Section 11 3 1 1 on page 118 1 On a browser over an IP connection choose Data Retrieval from the menu 2 Choose State Of Health then click Next 3 Choose the SOH data set that you want to extract Figure 11 8 then click Next Figure 11 8 Choose an SOH data set Select A Group of SOH or Choose A List of Channels User Selected csv User Selected csv GPSTime csv GPSSatellites cs s nvironmentSOH csv ailable Columns m taurus 0105 band alert
298. uld map as follows where is the version number Taurus Firmware V directory name release Digital Processor V tdp arm nbf ignore the A B Signal Processor V tdp dsp nbf Power Manager V tdp pwm nbf ignore the A B Filter Coefficients V tdp coeff nbf Fpga V tdp fpga nbf Flash Boot System V tcp uboot bin starts with 0 4 8 NMX Root File System V tcp rootfs update sh starts with NMX Kernel V tcp uimage starts with 2 4 24 NMX Apollo V apollo taurus tgz 15148R5 Taurus Portable Seismograph 171 2007 02 09 User Guide Appendix G Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures 15 Go to the Taurus Log In page and log in as central password central and then set the Active firmware to Default Click the Commit button 16 In a browser window confirm that the Active firmware 1s now also the Default firmware a Go to http ip_address_of_your_taurus 8080 firmware and confirm that the new firmware is both Default and Active b Go to http ip_address_of_your_taurus 8080 pwm and confirm that the new firmware is both Default and Active 17 The upgrade is now complete Optionally you may remove the installation files from the Taurus In the Upgrade page select the installation filename from the drop down list and then click Delete G2 Upgrading Taurus from Version 2 00 xx or higher Use the Taurus Web upgrade procedure for Taurus firmware upgrades after a Version 2 xx or higher has been
299. umber for each protocol FTP port 21 SSH port 22 and telnet port 23 50 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access To log in as root login or user is root See Section 6 2 1 for information about the root password The Taurus SSH server does not support multiple login attempts if you enter the wrong user name If you enter the user name incorrectly close the current SSH session and try again with a new session 6 2 1 Default passwords This section lists Taurus default passwords by firmware version for access to the Tau rus using protocols other than HTTP via a browser For user names and passwords to access the Taurus using HTTP via a browser see Section 6 1 User access via the Tau rus UT on page 47 During an upgrade of the Taurus firmware from version 1 x to version 2 x or higher the default root password is changed automatically once the rootfs has uploaded Caution lf you change the root password and then forget the password there is no way to recover it You will no longer be able to log in to the Taurus file system If you are logged in as user root you can change the root password using the passwd command Table 6 2 Default root passwords Taurus firmware version Default root password 1 x root 2 x dolphin18 To connect to the Taurus via PPP there is a fixed user name pppuser and password beaver16 This is planned to be config
300. urable in a future release See Chapter 7 Configuring Taurus Communications for information on using serial protocols 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 51 User Guide Chapter 6 Configuring Taurus User Access 52 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Configuring Taurus Communications This chapter provides an overview of Taurus communications options and procedures for changing network settings 7 1 Taurus networking You can configure Taurus for network access via an IP connection over either Ethernet or serial SLIP or PPP The Taurus will be accessible while it is in either Communica tions mode or Interactive mode see Section 3 1 About the Taurus operating modes on page 17 The network configuration options are in the Advanced Configuration gt Communications pages See Section H 13 2 on page 193 for a description of all Com munications page parameters You must be logged in as tech or central to change Communications settings see Chapter 6 See also Chapter 5 Changing a Taurus Configuration 7 1 1 Packet routing When packets are destined to a location outside of the immediate subnet more than a single hop a routing gateway is required The gateway is configured as an IP address of a machine The Taurus may have multiple gateways configured the Default Inter face parameter specifies which gateway is in effect and all packets not on an immedi ate subn
301. ure 11 5 a Choose the type of event list file to upload click the radio button 15148R5 2007 02 09 Taurus Portable Seismograph 1 1 1 User Guide Chapter 11 Accessing Data b Download the event list from the linked site and save it to your file system Each link opens the relevant site search page in a new window Options include IRIS Search ASCII The link opens http www iris edu quakes event srch htm Do a search then save using the ASCII Version link Upload the ASCII version to Taurus NEIC Epic Search Compressed The link opens http neic usgs gov neis epic Choose a search type Global Rectangular or Circular then choose option 2 Compressed File Format for the output file type Save and then upload the search to the Taurus as html NEIC Finger The link opens http neic usgs gov neis finger quake asc Save the document quake asc and upload it to the Taurus c Browse for the saved file and then click Upload to upload it to the Taurus Figure 11 5 Download an event list file then Upload it to the Taurus Data Retrieval Y Upload an event list file Choose the file format use the links to get a file C RIS Search ASCII NEIC EPIC Search Compressed C NEIC Finger m Choose the file to upload Browse Upload Manually Enter an Event Label Time Location Depth km Cyyyy MM dd HH mm ss lat lon depth A uz d Click Next to open the event list
302. uring installation these would be indicated by error messages on the screen If there are errors wait until the installation scripts have completed and then run them again gt If there is a power failure while the installation scripts are running the media might unmount If this occurs you must mount the media before you can run the installation scripts If the upgrade process is interrupted after the rootfs was successfully uploaded the root password will have changed to dolphin18 gt For the CF card enter the command mount t ext3 dev hdcl mnt cf gt For the IDE drive enter the command mount dev hdal mnt ide 1 70 Taurus Portable Seismograph 15148R5 User Guide 2007 02 09 Appendix G Taurus Firmware Upgrade Procedures Note In some browsers you may get an HTTP 404 error page not found when 9 attempting to access the Taurus after the new software is installed If this occurs clear your browser cache 11 Once the files have installed successfully you will see a message saying so start a browser on your PC and check the firmware version numbers The correspond ing files are tdp component versionNumber nbf a Go to http ip address of your taurus 8080 firmware b Confirm that the files have been uploaded correctly by comparing the version numbers on the page with the versions in the release 2 xx yy directory c Go to http ip address of your taurus 8080 pwm d Confirm that the file has been uploaded correctly
303. us Portable Seismograph 21 User Guide Chapter 3 Operating and Maintaining Taurus 3 3 6 Turn off the display You can turn off the display and end Interactive mode before the configured UI timeout expires This immediately shuts down the display and switches the Taurus to its con figured running mode either Buffered or Communications gt In the Shutdown page click Turn Off Display A browser will show the message Turning off display Please wait gt If you submit the Turn Off Display command from a browser do not refresh the old browser window after the Controller has been restarted as this will resubmit the Turn Off Display command 3 4 Using the Taurus keypad Taurus has a 5 key keypad for Taurus startup and for navigating the UI pages on the display Figure 3 2 The Taurus key functions equate to these standard keyboard func tions Centre key Enter Top key Up arrow Bottom key Down arrow Left key Shift Tab Right key Tab Figure 3 2 Taurus keypad functions Top key Move up through Centre key Select the option link options in a field Up arrow Enter Press and hold 1s to wake the Taurus Also press and hold for 5s will do a Controller hard shutdown but this is not recommended Left key Move back through fields links on the page Shift Tab Right key Move forward through fields links on the page Tab Bottom key Move down through options in a field Down ar
304. ut Filter page options 2 2 0 2 0 000 Ih 204 H 34 Detector page options 0 00 n 205 H 35 Power page OPti0NS o oooocococococoo rr 206 H 36 Upgrade page options 0 00 es 206 H 37 Log In page Options ossia sere ee a i hr 207 H 38 Log Off page OPti0NS oo ooocooooocr tenet ene 207 H 39 Change Password page options o oo oooooconocca nas 207 H 40 Shutdown page OPti0NS ooooocooo een teen eens 208 xiv Getting Started Introduction Quick Start Operating and Maintaining Taurus Introduction 1 1 About the Taurus The Taurus Portable Seismograph is a compact self contained digitizer and data logger that combines exceptional performance with versatility and low power consumption The Taurus can be used either as a stand alone time series data logger or as a compo nent in a data acquisition network Taurus incorporates a three channel 24 bit Digitizer GPS receiver and System Clock removable data storage and remote communication options Taurus is configurable locally using the colour display screen and integrated browser or remotely using any web browser over a TCP IP connection Taurus is equipped with three 24 bit data channels Time series data are stored in Steim 1 format and can be extracted to MiniSEED Seisan or ASCII format and streamed in Nanometrics NP format Taurus supports 10 100Base T Ethernet and serial inter faces Communication protocols include UDP IP T
305. ut down the Controller Shutdown Shutdown and insert the media you want to format See Section 10 3 1 Insert and remove recording media on page 99 for procedure details gt Do not remove or insert media if the MediaLED is red Wait until the Control ler has shut down and the MediaLED is green After you have closed the media door the Controller will boot automatically 2 Goto the Store Tools page and log in if required The Taurus will indicate that unformatted media are either not available or are not formatted Store tools to format and to switch media are available without logging in if the currently active media type is not present or not formatted that is Active Media is None Once you have formatted or switched media you will have to log in to access Store tools 3 Click Format MediaType for the medium you want to format e Tf this is the currently active media type the Taurus will format the medium and create a Store using the last Store configuration settings see also Section 10 2 1 on page 95 The Taurus will start recording to it automatically e If this is the currently inactive media type the Taurus leaves it as the inactive medium after formatting it gt If you want to record to the currently inactive medium after formatting is complete click Switch Media and choose a Store Size 10 3 2 2 Format previously formatted media For formatted media in the active slot the Taurus will show Store information For f
306. ve changes use the page navigation options as described in Section 3 6 3 3 6 3 Preserve configuration changes or data retrieval settings Use these methods for page navigation if you want to preserve changes to configuration and data retrieval settings during a session On Advanced Configuration sub pages navigate with the Previous button and the sub page hyperlinks to preserve changes that have not yet been applied See also Table H 12 Advanced Configuration page options on page 191 gt On Data Retrieval pages use the Next button to preserve changes See also Sec tion 11 1 3 1 Navigate Data Retrieval pages on page 106 3 6 4 Select an active field or a hyperlink gt Ina browser either use the mouse or the Tab and Enter keys to select a field or open a hyperlink gt In the display use the left and right keys to tab the focus through the active fields and links on a page A link with focus will have a dotted outline An active field with focus will have white text on a blue background Figure 3 4 Once you have tabbed to a link or an active field you can go to the linked page or choose an option in the active field press the centre key Figure 3 4 Examples of link and field with focus Advanced Configura Digitizer lt The Main link has focus W Configuration P Configuration Running Mode femine ine lt gt The Running Mode field has focus Nitt Channels 3 zi 3 7 Using the virtual
307. ype a name in the Computer Name box for example Taurus SLIP Click Next g Choose Communications cable between two computers COMx Click Next h Choose Anyone s use Click Next 1 Click Finish 3 In the Connect ComputerName dialog box ignore User name and Password k Click Properties 1 For Communications cable between two computers click Configure and use these settings i Set maximum speed to 57600 ii Ensure all check boxes are un checked iii Click OK m Click the Options tab and un check Prompt for name and password n Click the Networking tab and choose SLIP connection Un check all compo nents except TCP IP QoS Packet Scheduler 0 Double click TCP IP and choose Use the following IP address Set the IP address to the Remote IP configured in the Taurus p Click Advanced and use these settings i Un check Use IP header compression ii Set frame size to 1500 iii Click OK q Click OK on TCP IP properties Click OK on ComputerName Properties r Ensure the Taurus has been powered up and Serial 1 is connected to the COM port If all is well the message All devices are connected should appear briefly and the connection icon will show up immediately in the task bar 1 Test the connection by pinging the Local IP address configured on Taurus from a command prompt 7 3 4 8 Using CSLIP CSLIP provides minor amounts of compression to the li

Taurus Portable Seismograph User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents